JP6756784B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more particularly to a gaming machine capable of performing variable display and controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to the player.

Conventionally, as a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player. Some are configured to give to. Further, a variable display means capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display means, a predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give the player (so-called pachinko machine). Further, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of the identification information by the variable display device, and the player changes each. By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time predetermined from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. When a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, a predetermined game medium determined in advance is paid out according to the prize, and a specific prize is generated, the player sets the game state to the predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give to (so-called slot machine). The winning value is to pay out the winning ball or give a score or a prize according to the winning of the game ball in the winning area. Further, the game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the game machine becomes an advantageous state for the player who is likely to win a prize when a specific display result is obtained, or for the player. It is to generate the right to be in an advantageous state and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.
In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started by the variable display means based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If so, a "big hit (advantageous state)" will occur. The derivation display is to stop and display the symbol. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening opens a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, if a predetermined number (for example, 10) is won in the large winning opening, the large winning opening is closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each grand prize opening may be referred to as a "round".
Some such game machines are configured so that the waveform of the signal rises gently in order to suppress the radiation of radio waves from the substrate. For example, a game machine known to be able to suppress the occurrence of radio interference by having a signal processing unit (output means) deform and output a square wave so that the signal rises more slowly than the waveform of the square wave. (See Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-117505

According to such a game machine, radio wave radiation can be suppressed by making the waveform of the signal output by the output means slowly rise. However, if the waveform of the control signal rises gently uniformly, the resistance to noise from the outside of the board on which the output means is provided is insufficient, and the noise resistance of the control signal to prevent malfunction is sufficient. It may not be possible to increase it to.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the noise immunity of a control signal for preventing malfunction .

(Means A) The game machine of means A is
It is a gaming machine that can display fluctuations and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Control means for controlling electrical components and
An output means for outputting a specific signal for driving an electric component according to a control signal by a serial communication method from the control means is provided.
The output means raises the output state when the input control signal is output to another output means in a first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined mode and a change mode in which the waveform rises more slowly than the first output state. It can be set to any output state of the second output state,
The other output means is provided on the same substrate as the output means.
The output means is set to the second output state .
The output means has a stop function of stopping the output of a specific signal after a lapse of a predetermined period from the input of the control signal, and the stop function can be enabled or disabled.
Further provided with a control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal.
It is characterized by that.
(Means B) The game machine of means B is
It is a gaming machine that can display fluctuations and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Control means for controlling electrical components and
An output means for outputting a specific signal for driving an electric component according to a control signal by a serial communication method from the control means is provided.
The output means raises the output state when the input control signal is output to another output means in a first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined mode and a change mode in which the waveform rises more slowly than the first output state. It can be set to any output state of the second output state,
The other output means is provided on another board connected to the board on which the output means is provided via a wiring member.
The output means is set to the first output state.
The output means has a stop function of stopping the output of a specific signal after a lapse of a predetermined period from the input of the control signal, and the stop function can be enabled or disabled.
Further provided with a control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal.
It is characterized by that.
Further, as a conventional game machine, after a character as a suggestion image suggesting that a pending change is performed, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-79524, is displayed over a plurality of variable displays. There is a device that changes the display mode of the hold display by executing an action effect acting on the hold display. In such a game machine, the character itself as a suggestion image that performs a hold change does not change, so that it may be uninteresting. Therefore, in such a game machine, it is required to improve the interest of the game in the process before executing the action effect.
(Means 1) The gaming machine of means 1 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player by displaying fluctuations.
Specific display means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, processing of S707 in FIG. 10, etc.) capable of displaying specific display (hold display, active display, etc.) of variable display, and
The suggestion image (first character image 91, second character image 92, etc.) related to the change in the display mode of the specific display is different from the display area of the specific display (total hold storage display unit 18c, etc. in FIG. 12) ( Suggestion image display means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) that can be displayed in the lower right area of the effect display device 9 shown in FIG.
An action effect of changing the display mode of the specific display by causing the suggestion image to act on the specific display (as shown in FIGS. 12 (c), (e), and (g), an effect of inserting an arrow into the hold display, etc. ), And an action effect execution means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.)
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, a right frame LED 909c, and operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, microcomputer 90120 for effect control) and
An output means (for example, an output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving an electric component according to a control signal by a serial communication method from the control means. , Light emitter driver 90411, motor drive driver 90412, illuminant driver 90413a to 90413c).
The output means sets the output state when the input control signal is output to another output means as a first output state in which a waveform rises according to a predetermined mode (for example, a normal slew rate output state (see FIG. 32 (1)). )) And the second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode of change that is slower than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 32 (2))). It is possible (for example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), it is set to a normal slew rate output, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), it is set to a low slew rate output (FIG. 31). reference)),
Other output means are provided in the same substrate as the output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 25, a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, and the control signals emit the same light emission. (Sequentially transmitted between illuminant drivers on the body control board 9016C),
The output means is set to the second output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 35, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is set to H (high). (Set to low slew rate output state),
The suggestion image display means can change the display mode of the suggestion image during the period from the display of the suggestion image to the execution of the action effect (shown in FIGS. 12 (f) and 12 (g)). As described above, it is possible to change the display mode of the character image to the second character image 92 after displaying the first character image 91 before the action effect is executed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the process before executing the action effect. In addition, the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be improved.

(Means 2) The gaming machine of means 2 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player by displaying fluctuations.
Specific display means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, processing of S707 in FIG. 10, etc.) capable of displaying specific display (hold display, active display, etc.) of variable display, and
The suggestion image (first character image 91, second character image 92, etc.) related to the change in the display mode of the specific display is different from the display area of the specific display (total hold storage display unit 18c, etc. in FIG. 12) ( Suggestion image display means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) that can be displayed in the lower right area of the effect display device 9 shown in FIG.
An action effect of changing the display mode of the specific display by causing the suggestion image to act on the specific display (as shown in FIGS. 12 (c), (e), and (g), an effect of inserting an arrow into the hold display, etc. ), And an action effect execution means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.)
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, a right frame LED 909c, and operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, microcomputer 90120 for effect control) and
An output means (for example, an output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving an electric component according to a control signal by a serial communication method from the control means. , Light emitter driver 90411, motor drive driver 90412, illuminant driver 90413a to 90413c).
The output means sets the output state when the input control signal is output to another output means as a first output state in which a waveform rises according to a predetermined mode (for example, a normal slew rate output state (see FIG. 32 (1)). )) And the second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode of change that is slower than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 32 (2))). It is possible (for example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), it is set to a normal slew rate output, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), it is set to a low slew rate output (FIG. 31). reference)),
Another output means is provided on another board connected to the board on which the output means is provided via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable or a wire harness) (for example, shown in FIG. 29 (2)). As described above, the illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different illuminant control boards 9016D to 9016F, respectively, and the illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the illuminant control boards 9016D to 9016F having different control signals are sequentially mounted. (Transmitted),
The output means is set to the first output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 37, in the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, the S terminal is L (low). ) Is set to the normal slew rate output state),
The suggestion image display means can change the display mode of the suggestion image during the period from the display of the suggestion image to the execution of the action effect (shown in FIGS. 12 (f) and 12 (g)). As described above, it is possible to change the display mode of the character image to the second character image 92 after displaying the first character image 91 before the action effect is executed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the process before executing the action effect. In addition, the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be improved.

(Means 3) A gaming machine of means 1 or means 2.
In the period from the display of the suggested image to the execution of the action effect, the change effect limiting means for restricting the execution of the change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display (microcomputer 100 for effect control, FIG. 16). If the change effect restriction flag is set in S502 of S502, the subsequent processing is not executed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the action effect using the suggestion image.

(Means 4) A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 3.
The first pattern (FIG. 12) in which the suggestion image is displayed in the first aspect and then the action effect is executed.
As shown in (b) and (c), the first pattern in which the first character image 91 is displayed and then the arrow is inserted into the hold display) and
A second pattern (FIG. 12) in which the suggestion image is displayed in the second aspect and then the action effect is executed.
As shown in (d) and (e), the second pattern in which the second character image 92 is displayed and then the arrow is inserted into the hold display) and
A first character image as shown in FIGS. 12 (f) and 12 (g), in which the suggested image is displayed in the first aspect, then changed to the second aspect, and then the action effect is executed. 9
After displaying 1, the second character image 92 is changed to the second character image 92, and then the arrow is inserted into the hold display, etc.).

According to such a configuration, a plurality of patterns can be executed, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

(Means 5) The game machine of means 4,
The second pattern has a higher expectation that the specific display will change than the first pattern, and the third pattern has a higher expectation that the specific display will change than the first pattern (FIG. 14). As shown in (B) and (C), the change effect is more easily executed in the second pattern than in the first pattern (it is difficult to select the ghost effect), and the third pattern changes more than the first pattern. It is easy to perform the production (it is difficult to select the Gase production), etc.).

With such a configuration, the player can pay attention to which pattern is executed.

(Means 6) A game machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The degree of expectation that the specific display changes differs depending on the period from the display of the suggestion image to the execution of the action effect (as shown in the modified example, the action effect is performed after the character image is displayed. The degree of expectation that the hold display will change depends on the period until it is executed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the period from the display of the suggestion image to the execution of the action effect.

(Means 7) A game machine according to any one of means 1 to 6.
The period from the display of the suggestion image to the execution of the action effect is a period spanning a plurality of variable displays (as shown in S510 and S512 of FIG. 16), after the character image is displayed. From the effect execution timing determination table of 15, the period over a plurality of variable displays is determined as the period of the action effect, etc.).

With such a configuration, the player can be noticed during a period of a plurality of variable displays.

(Means 8) A game machine according to any one of means 1 to 7.
Hold storage means (RA) that stores variable display that has not been started as hold storage.
M55 etc.) and
Hold display means (effect display device 9, total hold storage display unit 18c, etc.) capable of displaying hold storage stored by the hold storage means as hold display (hold display, etc.), and
Fluctuation response display means (effect display device 9, active display area AHA, etc.) capable of performing fluctuation response display (active display, etc.) corresponding to the variation display during execution of the variation display.
When,
A change in the hold display mode (such as a change during the hold display in FIG. 18) that changes the mode of the hold display before the change display of the target hold memory is executed, and a mode of the change correspondence display during the execution of the change display. A plurality of timings of at least one of the display mode changes (such as the change during active display in FIG. 18) to be changed during the hold display period and the change display period corresponding to the target hold memory. Further provided with display mode changing means (display mode change timing determination function of the effect control microcomputer 100, etc.) that can be executed at any of the timings (second embodiment, etc.).
In the display mode changing means, the type of display of the change target (display at the time of pending appearance, etc.) is normally displayed (
The first specific display (character icon shape display mode at the time of appearance of FIG. 17 (A), etc.) and the second specific display (character at the time of appearance of FIG. 17 (B)), which are different from the circular shape display mode shown in FIG. The display mode changes (FIGS. 17A and 17B, B) depending on which of the icon shape display modes and the like.
) Appears to the first change display or the second change display), the selection ratio of the timing for executing the execution is different (as shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B in the second embodiment). In addition, the character icon shape display mode has a high change effect execution rate during the hold display, and FIG.
As shown in 8 (E) to (L), the rate at which the display mode actually changes when the change effect is executed is equal between the hold display and the active display. Therefore, the frequency at which the icon display mode changes between the hold display and the active display differs depending on whether the character icon shape display mode or the character icon shape display mode is used, and the hold display mode and the active display mode are active. The ratio of selecting whether to change the display mode during display is different).

According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the type of the display to be changed and the timing of the change in the display mode with respect to the change in the hold display mode and the change in the display mode corresponding to the change. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to the following means 9 to 16. Conventionally, as a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player. Some are configured to give to. Further, a variable display means capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display means, a predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give the player (so-called pachinko machine). Further, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of the identification information by the variable display device, and the player changes each. By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time predetermined from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. When a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, a predetermined game medium determined in advance is paid out according to the prize, and a specific prize is generated, the player sets the game state to the predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give to (so-called slot machine). The winning value is to pay out the winning ball or give a score or a prize according to the winning of the game ball in the winning area. Further, the game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the game machine becomes an advantageous state for the player who is likely to win a prize when a specific display result is obtained, or for the player. It is to generate the right to be in an advantageous state and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started by the variable display means based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If this is done, a "big hit (advantageous state)" will occur. The derivation display is to stop and display the symbol. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening opens a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, if a predetermined number (for example, 10) is won in the large winning opening, the large winning opening is closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 rounds).
An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each grand prize opening may be referred to as a "round".

Some such game machines are configured so that the waveform of the signal rises gently in order to suppress the radiation of radio waves from the substrate. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117505 (
In particular, a signal processing unit (output means) as shown in paragraphs 0071,096, FIG. 6).
However, there are known gaming machines that can suppress the occurrence of radio interference by deforming and outputting a square wave so that the signal rises more slowly than the waveform of the square wave.

According to such a game machine, radio wave radiation can be suppressed by making the waveform of the signal output by the output means slowly rise. However, if the waveform of the control signal rises gently uniformly, the resistance to noise from the outside of the board on which the output means is provided is insufficient, and the noise resistance of the control signal to prevent malfunction is sufficient. It may not be possible to increase it to. In view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine capable of increasing the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction.

(Means 9) In order to achieve the above object, another aspect of the gaming machine is
Electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitting body units 9071 to 9074, a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, a right frame LED 909c, and movable members 9051 to 905.
Control means for controlling the operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating 4 (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90120), and
An output means (for example, an output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving an electric component according to a control signal by a serial communication method from the control means. , Light emitter driver 90411, Motor drive driver 90
412, with illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c)
The output means sets the output state when the input control signal is output to another output means as a first output state in which a waveform rises according to a predetermined mode (for example, a normal slew rate output state (see FIG. 32 (1)). )) And the second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode of change that is slower than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 32 (2))). It is possible (for example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), it is set to a normal slew rate output, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), it is set to a low slew rate output (FIG. 31). reference)),
Other output means are provided in the same substrate as the output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 25, a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, and the control signals emit the same light emission. (Sequentially transmitted between illuminant drivers on the body control board 9016C),
The output means is set to the second output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 35).
In the illuminant driver 90411 mounted on the illuminant control board 9016C, the S terminal is set to H (high) and the output state is set to a low slew rate).

According to such a configuration, the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be improved.

(Means 10) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of yet another aspect is
Electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitting body units 9071 to 9074, a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, a right frame LED 909c, and movable members 9051 to 905.
Control means for controlling the operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating 4 (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90120), and
An output means (for example, an output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving an electric component according to a control signal by a serial communication method from the control means. , Light emitter driver 90411, Motor drive driver 90
412, with illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c)
The output means sets the output state when the input control signal is output to another output means as a first output state in which a waveform rises according to a predetermined mode (for example, a normal slew rate output state (see FIG. 32 (1)). )) And the second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode of change that is slower than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 32 (2))). It is possible (for example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), it is set to a normal slew rate output, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), it is set to a low slew rate output (FIG. 31). reference)),
Another output means is provided on another board connected to the board on which the output means is provided via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable or a wire harness) (for example, shown in FIG. 29 (2)). As described above, the illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different illuminant control boards 9016D to 9016F, and the illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the illuminant control boards 9016D to 9016F having different control signals.
Sequentially transmitted between),
The output means is set to the first output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 37).
Light emitter drivers 90413a to 9 mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F
In 0413c, the S terminal is set to L (low) and is set to a normal slew rate output state).

According to such a configuration, the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be improved.

(Means 11) In the gaming machine of means 9 or means 10.
The output means is a specific signal output unit (for example,) grouped into a plurality of different groups.
A specific signal (for example, an output signal from each driver output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) is output from each driver output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) by a parallel communication method (for example, an output signal from each driver output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) (
For example, in the case of a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, as shown in FIG. 34, each group is divided into 6 groups of 4 channels. Further, in the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, each group is divided into 3 groups of 4 channels. ),
The output timing of the specific signal from the specific signal output unit differs for each group (for example, as shown in FIG. 34, the output timing of the output signals from the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11 is distributed for each group. It may be configured as (is).

According to such a configuration, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be further suppressed.

(Means 12) In the gaming machine of means 11,
A movable member (for example, movable members 9051 to 9054) that performs an operation is provided.
Drive means for operating the movable member (for example, operation motors 9060A to 9060C)
Is driven based on a specific signal output from a specific signal output unit of the same group of output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36, with respect to a signal input to the same operation motor,
It may be configured to be connected to a drive output terminal belonging to the same group).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in driving accuracy of the driving means while suppressing radio wave radiation from the substrate.

(Means 13) In any of the gaming machines from means 9 to means 12.
The output means has a stop function (for example, a time-out function) for stopping the output of a specific signal after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the input of the control signal (for example, the T terminal is H).
By setting it to (High), the timeout function is set to the enabled state. See FIG. 31. ) May be configured.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a malfunction due to a wiring malfunction or the like, and it is possible to stably control electrical components.

(Means 14) In the gaming machine of means 13,
In the control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90120 is used in the effect control process process (see step S9065).
By repeatedly outputting control signals at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example), lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, and a right frame LED 909c. Is continuously executed, or the drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C is continuously executed)).

According to such a configuration, control corresponding to the stop function of the output means can be realized.

(Means 15) In the gaming machine of means 13 or means 14.
The output means can enable or disable the stop function (for example, set the T terminal to L (for example).
By setting it to low), the timeout function is set to the disabled state, and by setting the T terminal to H (high), the timeout function is set to the enabled state. See FIG. 31. )
It may be configured as follows.

With such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting of the stop function of the output means according to the application.
Costs can be reduced by standardizing parts.

(Means 16) In any of the gaming machines from means 9 to means 15.
The control means is provided on a first substrate (for example, an effect control substrate 9012) and includes movable members (for example, movable members 9051 to 9054) that perform operations.
The control means is derived from a detection means (for example, a movable member position sensor 9061) capable of detecting the state of the movable member when the first substrate and a second substrate different from the first substrate are connected. It is possible to perform abnormality notification of the movable member based on the signal of (for example, see steps S9058 to S9060 of the effect control main process), and the first substrate and the second substrate (for example, the effect control relay board 9016A). (For example, step S905 of the effect control main process) is controlled so as not to notify the abnormality of the movable member when is not connected to the movable member.
7 and the like) may be configured.

With such a configuration, work efficiency in the manufacturing stage and the development stage can be improved.

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a figure which shows the hit type table. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in the main board (game control board). It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot determination table and jackpot type determination table. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern table used for determining a variation pattern in a tabular form. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a figure for demonstrating the action effect. It is a figure which shows the pending change mode determination table. It is a figure which shows the hold change effect decision table and Gase effect decision table. It is a figure which shows the effect execution timing determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead notice processing. It is a figure which shows the character icon selection table and the character icon selection table. These are various data tables used when the hold display is determined to display an icon shape such as a character icon or a character icon. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the case where a plurality of movable members are in the advanced state. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the effect movable mechanism. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows various circuits mounted on an effect control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the setting example of the storage content. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the light emitting body control board for controlling the lighting of a plurality of light emitting bodies which make up a light emitting body. It is a figure which shows the setting example which divides into a plurality of blocks. It is a figure which shows the connection setting example of a serial output system and a light emitting body block. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of a light emitter driver. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the drive control board, and the structural example of the light emitting body control board for performing lighting control of the top frame LED909a, the left frame LED909b and the right frame LED909c. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each input / output terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit shown in FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the slew rate setting of the through output of a clock signal and data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control data format. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the output timing of the signal from each drive output terminal in a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification at the time of branching the control signal output by one light emitting body driver mounted on a light emitting body control board on a board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control process process. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the terminal of a connector, a harness, and the input / output contents. It is a figure which shows the execution example of abnormality notification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a memory inspection process. It is a figure which shows the display example of the operation content. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of an effect control pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the lighting data generation table. It is a figure which shows the composition example of audio data, and the operation example of playing music. It is a figure which shows the initial state and the operation pattern in the upper mechanism. It is a figure which shows the initial state and the operation pattern in the lower mechanism.

Hereinafter, an example of the embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and other gaming machines such as coin gaming machines and slot machines may be used, and any gaming machine capable of playing a game may be used. For example, any gaming machine may be used.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a hit type table.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine in which a gaming ball as a gaming medium is driven into a gaming area 7 to play a game. The pachinko gaming machine 1 has an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long square shape and
It consists of a game frame that can be opened and closed inside the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided in the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). (Excluding board 6)
It is a structure containing and. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game is played by driving a game ball as a game medium into a game area.

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 3. At the bottom of the hit ball supply plate 3,
A surplus ball tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply dish 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hit ball, and the like are provided. Also, on the back of the glass door frame 2,
The game board 6 is detachably attached. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 6 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, a game area 7 is formed in which the driven game ball can flow down.

The member forming the surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 4 is formed in a stick shape (bar shape) at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, the central portion of the lower plate) on the upper surface of the lower plate body, and the player Stick controller 12 that can be gripped and tilted in multiple directions (front, back, left and right)
2 is attached. In the stick controller 122, a player holds the operating rod of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand (for example, a left hand) and presses and pulls the stick controller 122 with a predetermined operating finger (for example, the index finger). A trigger button 125 (see FIG. 3) capable of instructing operation is provided, and inside the operating rod of the stick controller 122, a trigger sensor 121 (FIG. 3) that detects a predetermined instructing operation by pushing / pulling the trigger button 125 or the like. See) is built-in. Further, an inclination direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting an inclination operation with respect to the operation stick is provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 122. Further, the stick controller 122 is provided with a vibrator motor 126 (for vibrating the stick controller 122).
(See Fig. 3) is built-in.

On the member forming the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3, for example, the player performs a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 122) on the upper surface of the upper plate main body. A possible push button 120 is provided. Push button 1
Reference numeral 20 denotes a mechanical, electrical, or mechanical or electrical operation of a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player.
It may be configured so that it can be detected electromagnetically. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) that detects a player's operation action performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 120. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may be moved to either the left or right side of the upper plate or the lower plate while maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, push button 12
The mounting positions of 0 and the stick controller 122 are not in the vertical positional relationship, but may be in the horizontal positional relationship, for example. As the operating means, other operating means such as a lever switch and a jog dial may be provided.

Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 as a first display means capable of variablely displaying (also referred to as variable display) an effect symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each is provided. On the right side of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a that variablely displays the first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them.
And a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b that variablely displays the second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each of them are provided.

Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is composed of a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variablely displaying numbers and characters. The effect display device 9 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and on the display screen, an effect symbol display area for performing a variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is provided. Be done. In the effect pattern display area, for example, there are three decorations (left, middle, and right).
A symbol display area is formed in which the effect symbols (for effect) are displayed in a variable manner.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as "special symbol", and the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be referred to as "special symbol display (variable display unit)". ) ”.

In this embodiment, the case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided is shown, but the gaming machine may include only one special symbol indicator.

Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on a main board (game control board). The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display 8a,
Along with the variable display, the effect display is executed on the effect display device 9, and the second special symbol display 8b
When the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variation display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

More specifically, in the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first starting condition or the second starting condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the first starting winning opening 13).
Or, after passing through the second start winning opening 14 (including winning), the start condition of the variation display (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). It is started based on the establishment of the state where the display is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. To do. In addition, the passing of the game ball means that the game ball has passed through a pre-determined area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept includes that the game ball has entered (winning) in the winning opening. Is. Further, to derive and display the display result is to finally stop and display the symbol (example of identification information).

When the jackpot display result (big hit symbol) as a specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, or when the jackpot display result (big hit symbol) as a specific display result is displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. When the derivation display is performed, the effect display device 9 also derivates and displays the jackpot display result (combination of jackpot symbols) as the specific display result. When the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display in this way, it is controlled to the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) as an advantageous state in which an advantageous value (advantageous value) is given to the player.

Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol). Stopped, rocked, scaled or deformed in a state that matches (combination of symbols), or multiple symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. Then, the effect performed in a state where the possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as "reach state") is "reach effect".
That is.

Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 form a part of the jackpot combination, the variable display of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed continues. The display state, or the display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. In other words, reach refers to a state in which identification information constitutes a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least a part of the variable display areas is in variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed in a state in which the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area, for example. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called "reach forming symbols" or "reach symbols".

The display effect in the reach state is the reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, during reach, unusual effects may be performed with lamps and sounds. This production is "
Reach production ". Further, at the time of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect symbol or the like)) can be displayed, or a display mode (for example, color or the like) of a background image of the effect display device 9 can be displayed. ) May be changed. The change in the display mode of the character and the display mode of the background is called "reach effect display". In addition, some reach is set so that when it appears, a big hit is more likely to occur than in a normal reach. Such a special reach is called "super reach".

Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided.
The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a.

Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, the game ball is opened to the second starting winning opening 14.
It becomes possible to win a prize (it becomes easier to win a starting prize), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball is more likely to win in the second starting winning opening 14 than in the first starting winning opening 13. Further, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, the game ball does not win the second starting winning opening 14. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, the game ball is more likely to win the first starting winning opening 13 than the second starting winning opening 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it may be difficult to win a prize, but it may be possible to win a prize (that is, it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize). Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a "starting winning opening or starting opening".

Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 18b composed of four indicators for displaying the number of valid winning balls entered in the second start winning opening 14, that is, the number of second hold storages. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 18b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

Further, above the second special symbol hold storage display 18b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first holding storage number (holding memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory. ) Is provided as a first special symbol hold storage display 18a composed of four displays. The first special symbol hold storage display 18a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, every time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started,
Reduce the number of lit indicators by 1.

The game machine is a ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball striking handle 5 and launches the game ball into the game area 7 by using the rotational force of the drive motor. ) Is provided. The game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, the first
If the variable display of the special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the first start condition is satisfied), the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 8a. (Variation) is started, and at the same time, the effect display device 9 starts the variation display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Unless it is possible to start the variable display of the first special symbol, the first reserved storage number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, and the variation display of the special symbol ends.
(The second start condition is satisfied), the second special symbol display 8b starts the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 14. Unless it is possible to start the variable display of the second special symbol, the second reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variation display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and the variation display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b.
The variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect symbol reminiscent of the jackpot on the effect display device 9. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

Further, at the lower position on the display screen of the effect display device 9, a hold storage display unit (total hold storage display unit) that displays the total number of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number (total hold storage number) is displayed. ,
A hold display area (not shown) is provided. In the total hold storage display unit, as the hold storage display, the number of hold storage images can be specified by, for example, the number of displayed images of a predetermined image (by displaying one hold storage image corresponding to each of the hold storage information). Specify the number of pending memories.) Is displayed. By providing the total hold storage display unit that displays the total number in this way, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that do not satisfy the start condition of the variable display. In each of the first special symbol hold storage display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and the effect display device 9, the light emitting display and the image display for indicating the number of hold storages are "hold display" or , Called "hold memory display".

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 21, so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 23.

In the jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 20 repeatedly controls the open state and the closed state repeatedly. In the repetitive continuous control, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 20 is open is called a round. As a result, the repetitive continuous control is also called round control. In this embodiment, a plurality of jackpot types are provided, and when it is decided to make a jackpot, one of the jackpot types is selected.

On the left side of the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variablely displaying normal symbols that can identify each of them is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variablely displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the ordinary symbol display 10 is configured to display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9 in a variable manner. Further, the small display is formed in a square shape, for example.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 1
The variable display of the display of 0 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 15 is closed a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time, which is disadvantageous to the player. It changes from to an open state that is advantageous for the player. In the vicinity of the ordinary symbol display 10, an ordinary symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Gate 32
Every time the game ball passes through, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by 1.

Further, an accessory 12 is provided above the effect display device 9. The character 12 is the game board 6
It is located between the effect display device 9 and the effect display device 9, and the position can be displaced by the accessory motor 17. The accessory 12 is usually located in a place that is difficult for the player to see, and moves to a position that is visible to the player when a predetermined effect is executed (for example, a position in front of the effect display device 9).

At the bottom of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 in which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in. Further, four speakers 27 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right upper parts and the lower left and right lower parts on the outside of the game area 7. A frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 7.

In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a “card unit”) that enables ball lending by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown).

In the hit type table of FIG. 2, for each type of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot game state, the base after the end of the jackpot game state, the fluctuation time after the end of the jackpot game state, and the number of times of opening in the jackpot ( The number of rounds) and the opening time of each round are shown.

Specifically, in the big hit game state, after the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened, the end condition of the predetermined open state (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or The closed state is set when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is satisfied (opening end condition). Then, when the opening end condition is satisfied, the continuation right is generated, and the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened again. The right to continue is generated for 15 rounds (final round), where the number of times of opening in the jackpot game state is a predetermined upper limit.
It is repeated until it reaches.

Of the "big hits", after being controlled to the big hit game state, as a special game state, the normal state (
The type of jackpot (type) that shifts to the probability variation state (abbreviation of probability fluctuation state, also called high probability state), which is a state in which the probability of being determined to be a jackpot is higher than that of a normal gaming state that is not a probability variation state). ) Is called "probability change jackpot". Further, in this embodiment, as the special gaming state, when the fluctuation time (variation display period) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is controlled to the time reduction state which is shorter than the non-time reduction state in association with the probability variation state. There is. It should be noted that the special gaming state may be controlled to a time saving state independently of the probability change state.

In this way, by shifting to the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, so that when the time saving state is reached, an effective start winning prize is likely to occur and a big hit game may be performed. Increase. Of the "big hits", the type of big hit that does not shift to the probabilistic state after being controlled to the big hit game state of 15 rounds is called "normal big hit".

Further, as a special game state, the variable winning ball device 1 is associated with the probability change state or the time saving state.
By increasing the frequency with which the 5 is in the open state, the frequency with which the game ball enters the variable winning ball device 15 is increased, and the winning of the variable winning ball device 15 is facilitated (higher entry, higher frequency). It may be controlled to the chew support control state. Since the electric chew support control state is a high base state as described later, it is mainly referred to as a “high base state” in the following description.

Here, the electric chew support control will be described. The electric chew support control includes a control that shortens the fluctuation time of a normal symbol (the time from the start of fluctuation display to the time of deriving and displaying the display result) to derive and display the display result at an early stage (normal symbol shortening control), and a normal symbol. Control to increase the probability that the stop symbol will be a hit symbol (normal symbol probability variation control), control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 (opening time extension control), and increase the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. Control (control to increase the number of times of opening) is performed. When such control is performed, the time ratio during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is higher than when the control is not performed, so that the winning frequency to the second starting winning opening 14 is high. (It becomes easier for the game ball to win a prize at the start (it becomes easier to satisfy the execution conditions of the variable display in the special symbol displays 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9). As a result of this control, the frequency of winning the second start winning opening 14 increases, so that the gaming state in which the frequency of establishment of the second start condition and / or the frequency of execution of the variation display of the second special symbol increases.

The state in which the winning frequency to the second starting winning opening 14 is increased by the electric chew support control (high frequency state) is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out as prize balls according to the winning to the number of shot balls. Since the "base" is in a higher state than when the control is not performed, it is called a "high base state". When such control is not performed, it is called a "low base state". Further, such a control is a control for facilitating the winning of the variable winning ball device 15, that is, the variable winning ball device 15 by supporting the winning with the electric tulip, and is called "electric chew support control".

In this embodiment, "high probability state (probability change state)" and "low probability state (non-probability change state)" are used as terms indicating a state of jackpot probability, and as a term indicating a combination of base states. , "High base state (electric chew support control state)" and "low base state (non-electric chew support control state)" are used.

Further, in this embodiment, as terms indicating a combination of the jackpot probability state and the base state, "low probability low base state", "low probability high base state", and "high probability high base state" are used. Use. "Low probability low base state" means that the jackpot probability state is a low probability state and
This is a state indicating that the base state is a low base state. "Low accuracy high base state" is
The jackpot probability state is a low probability state, and the base state is a high base state. The "high probability high base state" is a state indicating that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state and the base state is a high base state.

As shown in FIG. 2, as the 15-round jackpot, a plurality of types of jackpots, a normal jackpot and a probabilistic jackpot, are provided. The normal jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled into a non-probability change state, a time saving state, and a high base state (low probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds jackpot game state. In the normal jackpot, the non-probability state continues for a period until the next jackpot occurs, the time saving state and the high base state are executed until the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times, and the next jackpot. It continues for a period until the earlier condition, which is the condition until the occurrence of the above, is satisfied. In addition, the normal jackpot may be controlled so as to be a jackpot controlled in a non-probability change state, a non-time saving state, and a non-electric chew support control state (low probability low base state).

The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot in which control is performed to shift to a probability variation state, a time saving state, and a high base state (high probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds jackpot game state. In the probability variation jackpot, the condition that the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is satisfied. Continue until you do.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in the main board (game control board) and the effect control board. Note that FIG. 3 also shows a payout control board 37 and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 that controls the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. Game control microcomputer 56
0 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57. Game control microcomputer 56
0 is a 1-chip microcomputer having a ROM 54 and a RAM 55 built-in.
The game control microcomputer 560 also has a built-in random number circuit 503 that generates a hardware random number (a random number generated by the hardware circuit).

Further, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means in which a part or all thereof is backed up by a backup power source created on a power supply board (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (special symbol process flag, etc.) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM.

Since the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or processes) the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56). Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variation display of the special symbol. Random number circuit 50
In 3, the numerical data is updated according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and the start prize is generated at random timing. It has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random number value based on the time when the numerical data is read (extracted). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503.

Further, the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, and the second start port switch 14a
The input driver circuit 58 that gives the detection signal from the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. In addition, the output circuit 59 that drives the solenoid 16 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms the large winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also main. It is mounted on the substrate 31.

Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a for variable display of special symbols, a second special symbol display 8b, and a normal symbol display 10 for variable display of ordinary symbols.
The display control of the first special symbol reservation storage display 18a, the second special symbol reservation storage display 18b, and the normal symbol reservation storage display 41 is performed.

The effect control board 80 includes an effect control microcomputer 100, a ROM 102, and a RAM.
It is equipped with 103, VDP109, I / O port unit 105, and the like. ROM102
Stores programs and data for effect control such as display control. RAM 103
Used as working memory. The ROM 102 and the RAM 103 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 100. The VDP 109 cooperates with the effect control microcomputer 100 to control the display of the effect display device 9.

The effect control microcomputer 100 is an effect control command for instructing the effect content from the game control microcomputer 560 via a relay board 77 that allows signals to pass in only one direction from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. Is received to control the variation display of the effect display device 9, and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35.
In addition to controlling the display of, various effects such as controlling the sound output from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70 are performed.

Further, the effect control CPU 101 is a trigger button 12 of the stick controller 122.
An operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to 5 has been detected is input from the trigger sensor 121 via the input port of the I / O port unit 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 120 has been detected from the push sensor 124 via the input port of the I / O port unit 105. To do. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation rod of the stick controller 122 is detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 to the I / O port unit 105. Enter through the port. Further, the effect control CPU 101 vibrates the stick controller 122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port of the I / O port unit 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives the accessory motor 17 via a motor drive circuit (not shown) to operate the accessory 12.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In FIG. 4, the type of random number, update range, usage,
And the addition conditions are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R: A random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit. Random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, added and updated up to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated again from 0.
(2) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (type, normal jackpot, or any type of probability variation jackpot) and jackpot symbol (for jackpot type determination, jackpot symbol determination).
(3) Random 2 (MR2): Determines the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for determining the fluctuation pattern type).
(4) Random 3 (MR3): The fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined (for determining the fluctuation pattern).
(5) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for determining a normal symbol hit).
(6) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4).

In this embodiment, as the jackpot in the specific gaming state, a plurality of types of a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot are included. Therefore, when a big hit is decided based on the value of the big hit judgment random number (random R), the big hit type judgment random number (random 1)
), The jackpot type is determined to be one of these jackpot types. Further, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined at the same time based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1). Therefore, random number 1 is also a random number for determining a jackpot symbol.

Further, as for the fluctuation pattern, first, the fluctuation pattern type is determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and any of the variation pattern types included in the determined variation pattern type using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). Determine the fluctuation pattern. As such, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-step lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more fluctuation patterns belong to the fluctuation pattern type. The fluctuation pattern type is
It is also called a variable type.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type, which is a fluctuation pattern type without reach, and a reach fluctuation pattern type, which is a fluctuation pattern type with reach.

Such a fluctuation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern type is different between the time saving state and the non-time saving state when the display result is out of order. When is, the fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the case where the time is not shortened. For example, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of a predetermined fluctuation pattern is set shorter than that in the non-time-shortening state in order to shorten the average time of the fluctuation time as compared with the non-time-shortening state, or the fluctuation pattern type is the most variable. The rate of selecting the fluctuation pattern type with the shortest time is high, and even when the reach type is selected, the rate of selecting the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach with the shortest fluctuation time among the fluctuation pattern types is set to be high. By doing so, the average time of the fluctuation time becomes shorter than when the time is not shortened.

It should be noted that such a fluctuation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio differs depending on whether the number of reserved storages of each special symbol to be variablely displayed is equal to or more than a predetermined number and less than a predetermined number. When the number of reserved storages of each special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the holding number reduction control is executed in which the variable display time is shortened as compared with the case where the number of reserved storages of each special symbol is less than a predetermined number. You may try to do it. For example, in the hold number reduction control state, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern type having a short fluctuation display time such as the normal fluctuation pattern type is selected is set to be higher than in the hold number reduction control state. , The average time of the variable display time may be shortened as compared with the case where the hold number reduction control state is not performed. Further, in the hold number shortening control, the fluctuation display time itself of the fluctuation pattern type may be shortened even when the same fluctuation pattern type is selected as compared with the case where the hold number shortening control state is not performed.

Further, the variation pattern may be a one-step determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery, instead of a two-step determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined.

FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. Figure 5
(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot judgment table is ROM5
It is a set of data stored in 4 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with a random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal time (non-probability variation) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability variation state, that is, a non-probability variation state) and a probability variation jackpot determination table used in the probability variation state.

In the normal jackpot determination table, each numerical value shown in the left column of FIG. 5 (A) is set as a jackpot determination value, and in the probability variation jackpot determination table, it is described in the right column of FIG. 5 (A). Each numerical value is set as a jackpot judgment value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change becomes the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at normal time (referred to as the jackpot judgment value at normal time or the first jackpot judgment value) at the time of probability change. Due to the addition of the unique jackpot judgment value, the number is larger than the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change (10 times the number)
The jackpot determination value (referred to as the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change or the second jackpot determination value) is set. As a result, it is determined that the probability change state is a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. 5 (A).
If any of the jackpot determination values shown in is matched, it is decided to make a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) for the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 5A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit.

5 (B) and 5 (C) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 54. FIG. 5B shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the hold memory (also referred to as “first hold memory”) based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening 13 (variation of the first special symbol). This is the first special symbol jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) used for (when the display is performed). FIG. 5C shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the hold memory (also referred to as “second hold memory”) based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening 14 (variation of the second special symbol). This is the second special symbol jackpot type determination table used for (when the display is performed).

Each of the first and second special symbol jackpot type determination tables of FIGS. 5 (B) and 5 (C) is used for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot symbol. Based on the random number (random 1) of, the type of jackpot is determined to be either "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot", and is referred to for determining the jackpot symbol.

In the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5B, the numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1 and the determination values corresponding to each of "normal jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" (big hit type determination). Value) is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (C),
It is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1, and a judgment value (big hit type judgment value) corresponding to each of "normal big hit" and "probability variation big hit" is set.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 (B) and 5 (C), the jackpot type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. "
The judgment value corresponding to "normal jackpot" is "3" of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.
It is also set as a judgment value corresponding to. The judgment value corresponding to the "probability change jackpot" is the first
It is also set as a judgment value corresponding to "7" of the big hit symbol of the special symbol and the second special symbol.

Using the jackpot type determination table, the CPU 56 determines as the jackpot type the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value in which the random 1 value matches, and also determines the jackpot symbol in which the random 1 value matches as the jackpot symbol. To do. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

The first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (C) have the same ratio determined for the probability variation jackpot. In such a case, it is not necessary to divide the jackpot type determination table between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Also,
When selecting the jackpot type from a plurality of types of jackpots having different maximum number of rounds in the jackpot game state as the jackpot type, the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 5 (C) is used in FIG. 5 (B). ) May be set so that the ratio of selecting the jackpot type with a large number of rounds is higher than that of the first special symbol jackpot type determination table. In this way, in a high base state, the selection of the type of jackpot is advantageous for the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 5 (C) is shown in FIG.
The rate of determination of the probability variation jackpot may be higher than that of the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of (B). By doing so, the rate of the probability variation jackpot can be made higher in the variation display of the second special symbol than in the variation display of the first special symbol. Further, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table may have a higher rate of determination of the probability variation jackpot than the second special symbol jackpot type determination table.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, a variation pattern table used for selecting and determining variation patterns of special symbols and effect symbols in the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a variation pattern table used for determining a variation pattern in a tabular format.

In FIG. 6, (a) shows a table for determining when the normal state is out, and FIG. 6 (b) shows a table for determining when the time saving state is out. Further, (c) shows a normal jackpot determination table, and (d) shows a probability variation jackpot determination table. Each of the determination tables of FIGS. 6 (a) to 6 (d) is stored in the ROM 54, is selected according to the gaming state, and is used for determining (determining) the variation pattern type and the variation pattern.

The determination table shown in FIG. 6 includes a variation pattern type determination table showing the relationship between the random 2 and the variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determination table showing the relationship between the random 3 and the variation patterns belonging to each type for each variation pattern type. Including.

In the column of "variation pattern type" or "variation pattern" in each table of FIG. 6, "
"Normal" or "normal fluctuation" indicates a normal fluctuation pattern that does not reach.

Further, the "normal reach" in each table of FIG. 6 shows a fluctuation pattern of the normal reach that does not perform a particularly flashy effect when the reach state is reached. "Super Reach"
Indicates a variation pattern for performing a reach effect that displays a special effect image when the reach state is reached.

Further, as described above, "super reach" is a fluctuation pattern in which the ratio of selection when a big hit is obtained is higher than that of "normal reach", and the reliability of the big hit is high. Further, the "super reach" is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is longer than that of the "normal reach" (for example, the normal reach is 10 seconds and the super reach is 50 to 80 seconds). In addition, four types of fluctuation patterns are set for the super reach, and the degree of expectation of a big hit (a big hit) is such that the first super reach <the second super reach <the third super reach <the fourth super reach. (Possibility) is high.

The "expectation degree" is a concept including an expectation degree for a big hit, an expectation degree for a probability change, and the like. Specifically, the degree of expectation for a big hit (also referred to as reliability) is the degree of expectation (the ratio of a big hit) that becomes a big hit when each reach fluctuation pattern is selected. For example, the reach fluctuation is performed 100 times. If the jackpot is 60 times, the expectation for the jackpot is 60% (the appearance rate (probability) of the jackpot is 60%). Further, the degree of expectation for the probability change means the degree of expectation (ratio of probability change) to shift to the probability change state.

The fluctuation pattern shown in the deviation time determination table is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the fluctuation display is the display result of “off”. The fluctuation pattern shown in the normal jackpot determination table is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the fluctuation display is the display result of "normal jackpot". The variation pattern shown in the probability variation jackpot determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is the display result of "probability variation jackpot".

Based on this information, for example, the "variation pattern" column of FIG. 6 (a) shows "
The fluctuation pattern of "fourth super reach (80 seconds)" is shown to be "a fluctuation pattern of the fourth super reach in which the fluctuation time resulting from the off-display result is executed in 80 seconds".

In the table of FIG. 6, the columns described as "random 2 range" and "variation pattern type" function as a variation pattern type determination table unit showing the relationship between "random 2 range" and "variation pattern type". It is a column to show. For example, in FIG. 6A as an example, "normal"
, "Normal reach", "Super reach", etc., all the values of random 2 (1-251) are divided into a plurality of numerical ranges and assigned to each of the plurality of fluctuation pattern types. For example, in FIG. 6A as an example, if the value of random 2 extracted at a predetermined timing matches any of the determination values assigned to 140 to 229 among the random values of 1 to 251. , It is decided to set "normal reach" as the fluctuation pattern type.

Further, in the table of FIG. 6, the columns described as "random 3 range" and "variation pattern" indicate the function as a variation pattern determination table unit showing the relationship between the "random 3 range" and the "variation pattern". It is a column. The fluctuation patterns shown corresponding to each type of the fluctuation pattern type determination table are the fluctuation patterns belonging to each type. For example, FIG. 6 (a)
For example, the fluctuation patterns belonging to the type of "super reach" are "first super reach", "second super reach", "third super reach", and "fourth super reach".

Random 3 (1-2) for each of the plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each fluctuation pattern type
All the values in 20) are divided into a plurality of numerical ranges and assigned. For example, FIG. 6 (a)
For example, when it is decided to use the fluctuation pattern type of "super reach",
When the random 3 extracted at a predetermined timing matches any of the judgment values assigned to 1 to 70 among the random values of 1 to 220, the fluctuation pattern of "first super reach (50 seconds)" is obtained. It is decided to do.

When the variation display result for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is out of alignment, the determination table is selected as follows in order to determine the variation pattern. In non-time saving state
When the variation display result is out of alignment, the out-of-normal state determination table shown in FIG. 6A is selected. On the other hand, in the time saving state, when the variation display result is out of order, the time saving state out of time determination table shown in FIG. 6B is selected. By using the determination tables shown in FIGS. 6 (a) and 6 (b), the reach ratio is kept constant when the normal state is out of the normal state and when the time saving state is out of the range, regardless of the number of holdings.

When the variation display result for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit regardless of whether the time is shortened or not, the determination table is selected as follows in order to determine the variation pattern. When the variation display result is a normal jackpot, the normal jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 6C is selected. When the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot regardless of whether the time is shortened or not
Select the probability variation jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 6 (d).

In the time saving state out-of-time determination table of FIG. 6B, the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation is set shorter than that of the normal state out-of-time determination table of FIG. 6A. Then, in the time saving state out-of-time determination table of FIG. 6 (b), the fluctuation time is shorter than the reach variation (including the normal reach variation and the super reach variation) as compared with the normal state out-of-time determination table of FIG. 6 (a). The ratio determined for normal fluctuation (non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation (variation that results in out-of-reach display result without reaching)) is high, and the ratio determined for reach fluctuation with a longer fluctuation time than normal fluctuation is low. The data is set.

As a result, the rate of selection of fluctuation patterns with shorter fluctuation times is higher in the non-time saving state than in the non-time saving state (normal state), so that in the non-time saving state, the non-time saving state is selected. The fluctuation display is performed with a fluctuation time that is shorter on average than in the case of. By selecting the determination table in this way, the time saving state can be realized. In addition, by setting the normal fluctuation so that the fluctuation time is shorter in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, it is possible to shorten the pending digestion during the time-saving state.

In the judgment tables of FIGS. 6 (a) and 6 (b) selected when the data is out of alignment, the data is set so that the selection ratio of the reach type is selected in a high-low relationship such that normal reach> super reach. Has been done. On the other hand, in the judgment tables of FIGS. 6 (c) and 6 (d) selected when a big hit occurs, the selection ratio of the reach type is selected in a high-low relationship such as normal reach <super reach. The data is set. As a result, when a big hit occurs, the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach (the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach when the reach is selected) is higher than that of the case of the loss, so that the reach of the super reach is increased. By producing the effect, the player's expectation can be increased.

Further, in the determination table of FIG. 6 (d) selected when the probability variation jackpot is obtained among the jackpots, compared with the determination table of FIG. 6 (c) selected when the normal jackpot is obtained among the jackpots.
The data is set so that the ratio of the type of super reach effect selected to the normal reach is high. As a result, when it becomes a probabilistic jackpot, the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach (the proportion of the reach effect of the super reach when the reach is selected) is higher than that of the normal jackpot. By performing the reach production of the reach, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player for the probable change jackpot.

In addition, such a fluctuation pattern is when the total reserved storage number (total value) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to be variable displayed is a predetermined number or more (for example, the total reserved storage number is 3 or more). By setting the selection ratio to be different depending on whether the number is less than the predetermined number, when the total number of reserved storages is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the fluctuation time is compared with the case where the total number of reserved storages is less than the predetermined number. May be executed to reduce the number of holds. However, even under the condition that the hold number shortening control is executed (for example, the total number of hold storages is 3 or more), the expectation for reach is maintained by keeping the ratio of reach (including normal reach and super reach) constant. Further, it is also possible to execute the hold number time reduction control so that the fluctuation time is not shortened only in the super reach among the reach. Further, the hold number time reduction control may be feasible by making the normal fluctuation with a short fluctuation time selected at a high rate, or may be feasible by shortening the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern itself. The combination may be used.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the game control microcomputer 560, as shown in FIG. 7, various effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the game control state.

The main commands in FIG. 7 will be described. The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating the variation pattern of the effect symbol to be variablely displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variation display of the special symbol (corresponding to each variation pattern XX). )
.. That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. 6, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 101 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 9 controls to start the variable display of the effect symbol.

The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are display result designation commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the big hit type.

The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is started. The command 8F00 (H) is a command (symbol confirmation designation command) for designating the end of the variation of the first and second special symbols.

The commands A001 to A002 (H) are jackpot start designation commands for designating the start of the jackpot game state for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

The command A1XX (H) is a designated command indicating that the large winning opening is open for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a designated command after opening the large winning opening, which indicates after opening (closing) the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The commands A301 to A302 (H) are jackpot end designation commands for designating the end of the jackpot game state for each type of jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

The command A401 (H) is a first start prize designation command for designating that there was a first start prize. The command A402 (H) is a second start prize designation command that specifies that there was a second start prize.

The command B000 (H) is a normal state specification command that specifies that the game state is a normal state (low probability state). The command B001 (H) is a time saving state designation command for designating that the gaming state is the time saving state (high base state). The command B002 (H) is a probability change state designation command that specifies that the game state is a probability change state (high probability state).

The command C0XX (H) is a total hold storage number designation command indicating the total hold storage number. The command C100 (H) is a total hold storage number subtraction designation command indicating that the total hold storage number is subtracted by 1. In this embodiment, the total reserved memory number designation command is executed at the time of starting a game ball to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (for example, when executing the start opening switch passing process described later). , Is sent to the effect control microcomputer 100. Further, the total hold storage number subtraction designation command is sent to the effect control microcomputer 100 at the start of the variation display (for example, when the special symbol variation display processing process described later is executed). The total hold storage specification command and the hold storage number subtraction specification command may also be used. For example, the total hold storage number specification command may be used as a command that can specify the hold storage number after subtraction. It should be noted that the effect control microcomputer 100 transmits a command capable of specifying the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number, respectively, not as the total reserved storage number, and the effect control microcomputer 100 transmits the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. The total value of and may be specified as the total number of pending storages.

The command C2XX (H) and the command C3XX (H) are the results of winning judgments such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, and variation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. This is an effect control command that indicates the content. Of these, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and the determination result of the type of jackpot among the winning determination results. Further, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) of which determination value range the value of the random number for determination of the variation pattern type falls within the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the jackpot is a big hit, the type of the jackpot, and the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the time of starting winning. .. Then, a value for designating a big hit and a value for designating the type of the big hit are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control microcomputer 100. A value that specifies a range of determination values as a determination result of the variation pattern type is set in the EXT data of the variation type command, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit and the type of the big hit at the time of starting winning, based on the value set in the symbol designation command. The fluctuation pattern type can be recognized based on the fluctuation type command.

Next, a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing data such as random numbers (holding storage data) corresponding to the holding storage on the game control microcomputer 560 side will be described. The hold storage buffer is provided in the RAM 55.

In the first hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the first hold storage number (4 in this example) is secured. Further, in the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, a random number for determining a jackpot, which is a hardware random number (random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type, which is a software random number (random 1), and a random number for determining a variable pattern type. (Random 2) and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (random number 3) are stored.

Based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, the CPU 56 extracts such random values from the random number circuit 503 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and obtains them. The process of saving (storing) in the storage area in the 1-hold storage buffer or the 2nd hold storage buffer is executed. Specifically, these random values are extracted and stored in the first hold storage buffer based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Further, these random values are extracted and stored in the second hold storage buffer based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 14.

The storage of information regarding the start winning prize as described above in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer may be indicated as "hold storage". The variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are not extracted at the time of starting winning and stored in advance in the storage area, but are described later in the variation pattern setting process (special). It may be extracted at the start of fluctuation of the symbol).

As will be described later, the data stored in the hold storage buffer in this way is read at the start winning prize and used for the look-ahead notice effect, and is read at the start of the variable display and used for the variable display.

When there is a start prize in the first start prize opening 13 or the second start prize opening 14, it is called a symbol designation command, a variable type command, a first (second) start prize designation command, and a total reserved memory number designation command. Such a command indicating the determination result of the start winning determination process is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. Microcomputer 100 for production control
The start winning command receive command buffer provided in the RAM 103 of the above corresponds to various commands such as a received symbol designation command, a variation type command, a first (second) start winning designation command, and a total hold storage number designation command. A storage area for storing data that can identify the received command is secured so that it can be attached and stored.

In this embodiment, the effect control pattern of the effect symbol performed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, and the effect symbol variation display operation and reach. It is composed of data showing the control contents of various production operations such as the production display operation in the production and the like, or various production operations that do not involve the variable display of the production symbol. Further, the advance notice effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control content of the effect operation that is the advance notice effect executed in response to the advance notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data and the like indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically interrupted at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) and the timer interrupt process is executed. By doing so, various game controls can be executed.

In the main processing, for example, necessary initial setting processing, initialization processing at normal time, game state recovery processing other than normal time, random number circuit setting processing (initial setting of random number circuit 503), random number update processing for display (variation pattern). (Update processing of various random numbers such as determination of type and determination of fluctuation pattern), random number update processing for initial value (update processing of initial value of count value of random number generation counter for normal symbol hit determination), and the like are executed.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs, CP
The U56 executes the timer interrupt processing of steps S (hereinafter, simply referred to as “S”) 20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (S20). Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their states are determined (switch processing: S21). ..

Next, the CPU 56 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage display 41 is executed (S22). 1st
For the special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, S
Control to output a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in 32 and S33.

In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each judgment random number such as a normal symbol hit judgment random number and a big hit type judgment random number used for game control is performed (judgment random number update process: S23). .. The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S24, S25).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process process (S26). In the special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the grand prize opening in a predetermined order, and the special symbol process is performed. The value of the flag is updated according to the game state.

Next, the normal symbol process process is performed (S27). In normal symbol process processing, CP
The U56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order, and updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the game state.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: S28). Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (S29).

Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 (
S30).

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 is an RA corresponding to the output state of the output port.
The contents related to the on / off of the solenoid in the M area are output to the output port (S31:
Output processing).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting the special symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the special symbol according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( S32).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). S33). Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.
The effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is executed.

After that, the interrupt permission state is set (S34), and the process ends. With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated at predetermined time intervals.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process process (S26). In the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, the start port switch passage process is executed (S312). Then, depending on the internal state, any of the processes S300 to S307 is performed.

In the game control microcomputer 560, the RAM 55 is connected to the RAM 55 as described above.
The first hold storage buffer for storing the hold storage data (first hold storage data) such as the jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start prize to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 A second hold storage buffer for storing hold storage data (second hold storage data) such as a random number for jackpot determination obtained based on the start winning is provided. In each of these hold storage buffers, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of storages of each hold storage (4 in this example) is secured.

In the start port switch passing process, if the first start port switch 13a is turned on, the number of stored first reserved storage data is the number of stored data on condition that the first reserved storage number does not reach the upper limit value (for example, 4). Numerical data (for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for determining a variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determination) are obtained from a random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number by increasing the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting. Random numbers) and put them in the first
Executes the process of saving (storing) in the storage area in the hold storage buffer. Further, the value of the total hold storage counter is increased by 1, and the process of storing (storing) the data indicating "first" in the hold specific area corresponding to the value of the total hold storage counter after the total is executed. On the other hand, if the second start port switch 14a is turned on, the second hold storage number is counted on the condition that the second hold storage number does not reach the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the hold storage counter is increased by 1, and numerical data (for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for determining a variation pattern type, and a random number for determining a variation pattern) are extracted from a random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number. And save them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (
Execute the process to store). Further, the value of the total hold storage counter is increased by 1, and the process of storing (storing) the data indicating "second" in the hold specific area corresponding to the value of the total hold storage counter after the total is executed.

The processes of S300 to S307 are as follows. Special symbol normal processing (S300
) Is a process of determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, and determining the type of big hit when it is a big hit. The variation pattern setting process (S301) determines the variation pattern (determines the variation pattern using the variation pattern type determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number), and clocks the variation time according to the determined variation pattern. This is a process for controlling the start of timekeeping of the variable time timer for the purpose.

The display result designation command transmission process (S302) is performed by the effect control microcomputer 10.
It is a process of controlling the transmission of the display result designation command to 0. Processing during special symbol change (
S303) is a process of advancing the process to the special symbol stop process when the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses. The special symbol stop process (S304) displays the fluctuation on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b when the passage of the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is timed by the fluctuation time timer. It is a process of stopping and deriving and displaying the stopped symbol.

The big winning opening pre-opening process (S305) is a special variable winning ball device 20 according to the type of big hit.
This is a process for controlling the opening of the large winning opening. Processing while opening the big prize opening (S306)
) Is a process of transmitting an effect control command for a round display effect during the jackpot game state to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a process of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the grand prize opening. If the conditions for closing the large winning opening are satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the process proceeds to the large winning opening pre-opening process (S305). When all the rounds are completed, the process proceeds to the jackpot end process (S307). The jackpot end process (S307) is a process of performing control or the like for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended.

Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80.

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the effect control main process. In the effect control main process, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the effect control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S701). ). After that, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 101
Clears the flag (S703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets data such as a flag capable of identifying what the received effect control command is. Processing (for example, processing for storing data that can identify the received command in various command storage areas provided in the RAM 103) and the like are performed (command analysis processing: S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect control process process (S705). In the effect control process process, in order to perform various effects such as variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 according to the contents of the effect control command analyzed in S704, the current control of each process according to the control state is performed. Select the process corresponding to the state (effect control process flag) and execute the effect control.

Next, random numbers used by the effect control microcomputer 100 (SR1-1 for determining the left stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-2 for determining the middle stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-3 for determining the right stop symbol of the effect symbol). , SR2 for determining the pending change mode, SR3 for determining the content of the change effect, etc.) Executes a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter (S706).
). Each of such random numbers SR1-1 to SR3 is generated by the count of a random counter whose count value is updated by software, and each of them is cyclically updated within a predetermined range and is determined for each. It is used as a random number by being extracted at the right timing.

Next, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the hold display in the hold display area (moving, erasing, etc. of the hold display) is executed (S707).

By executing such an effect control main process, the effect control microcomputer 100 transmits from the game control microcomputer 560 and responds to the effect control command received, the effect display device 9, various lamps, and the effect control computer 100. By controlling the effect devices such as the speakers 27L and 27R, various effect controls are performed according to the game state.

FIG. 11 shows an effect control process process (S7) in the effect control main process shown in FIG.
05) It is a flowchart which shows. In the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 10
In No. 1, after executing the look-ahead effect process (S500) for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and selecting the type of the look-ahead effect, S800 to S800 according to the value of the effect control process flag.
Perform any of the processes of S807.

In the effect control process process, the following processes are executed. In the effect control process process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled to realize the variable display of the effect symbol, but the control related to the variation display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also controlled by the second special symbol. The control related to the variation display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of is also executed in one effect control process process.

The look-ahead effect processing (S500) is a process of determining a look-ahead such as whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect, and determining an effect mode when executing the look-ahead effect. What is pre-reading production?
Before the turn of the special symbol variation display (symbol variation) based on a certain hold information (hold memory information) arrives, the hold information is read ahead and the content of the special symbol variation display based on the hold information is determined. Then, it is a production technique such as giving a notice at a stage before that what the variable display of the special symbol will be in the future. For example, when the hold information is a big hit, a big hit may occur later based on the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information before the variable display by the hold information is executed. A kind of effect such as giving a notice is performed as a look-ahead effect. Hereinafter, the variable display based on the hold information targeted for the look-ahead effect will be referred to as “target variable display”.

The variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) is a process of confirming whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. If the variation pattern command is received, the process shifts to the effect symbol variation start processing.

The effect symbol variation start process (S801) is a process for controlling the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) to be started. The effect symbol changing process (S802) is a process for controlling the switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern. The effect symbol fluctuation stop processing (S803) stops the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol),
This is a process for controlling the derivation and display of the display result (final stop symbol) of the variable display.

The jackpot display process (S804) is a process of performing display control such as control of displaying a fanfare effect for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of a jackpot after the end of the fluctuation time. The process during the round (S805) is a process for controlling the display during the round. If the final round is not completed when the round end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to post-round processing.
If the final round is completed, the process shifts to the jackpot end process. Round post-processing (S806
) Is a process for controlling the display between rounds. When the round start condition is satisfied, the process shifts to the processing during the round. The jackpot end effect process (S807) is performed on the effect display device 9.
This is a process of performing display control to notify the player that the jackpot game state has ended.

The effect control CPU 101 is used during a predetermined effect control period from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display, and from the start of the big hit game state to the end of the big hit game state.
The effect device (effect component) such as the effect display device 9 is controlled according to the process data set in the process table stored in the ROM 102.

The process table is composed of process timer setting values and data in which a plurality of combinations of display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variation time (variation display time) of the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) are described. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the effect symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Such a process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

[Hold change production]
Next, various effects will be described. In this embodiment, by changing the display mode of the hold display, a hold change effect indicating the jackpot expectation of the hold display is executed before the variable display of the changed hold display is started. In the hold change effect, the hold display that was normally displayed in white changes to one of blue, green, and red. The jackpot expectation is white <blue <
It increases in the order of green <red.

[Types of pending change effects]
The hold change effect includes a normal hold change effect in which the color of the hold display changes when a start prize is generated and the hold display is started or the hold display is shifted, and an action effect for changing the hold display. There is a hold change effect by an action effect that changes the hold display after execution.

[Action production]
In the action effect, the suggestion image related to the change in the display mode of the hold display is displayed in an area different from the display area of the hold display. Then, in the action effect, the display mode of the hold display is changed by acting the suggested image on the hold display. Here, the action is to have some influence on the hold display, and an example of a specific action effect will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, a predetermined period is provided from the display of the suggestion image to the execution of the action effect. Then, the display mode of the suggestion image may change in the period from the display of the suggestion image to the execution of the action effect. In addition, a plurality of types of action effects are provided. In this embodiment, the action effects of the first pattern to the third pattern are provided. In addition, the action effect is also provided with a pattern of the Gase effect in which the pending change does not occur.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the action effect. FIG. 12A is a diagram showing a display example of the effect display device 9 at the start of fluctuation. 12 (b), (d), and (f) are diagrams showing a display example of the effect display device 9 at the time when the suggestion image when the action effect is executed is displayed. Figure 1
2 (c), (e), and (g) are diagrams showing display examples of the effect display device 9 when the action effects of the first pattern to the third pattern are executed, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 12A, the state in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols are being displayed in a variable manner is indicated by three downward arrows. Further, as shown in FIG. 12A, in the display area of the effect display device 9, below the three downward arrows, a total hold indicating the total number of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number is shown. The storage display unit 18c is formed. The first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number may be displayed separately.

Further, in the total hold storage display unit 18c, when the variable display is started, the oldest hold display (the leftmost hold display) is deleted. Also, the remaining hold display is shifted one by one to the left. An image showing a variation-corresponding display corresponding to the variation display during execution of the variation display corresponding to the (moved, shifted) hold display deleted (hereinafter, active image or active display) from the total hold storage display unit 18c. The active display area AHA for displaying (referred to as) is formed in the lower left area in the display area of the effect display device 9. In the active display area AHA, the hold image displayed in the total hold storage display unit 18c corresponds to the hold image that has been displayed so far, for example, the hold image is moved (shifted) to the active display area AHA. Is displayed as an active display AH in a mode that can be identified as. The active display area AHA may be arranged at any position in the display area of the effect display device 9.

It is assumed that a new start prize is generated from the state of FIG. 12 (a), and the start prize is accompanied by a hold change effect (including a ghost effect that does not cause a hold change). Such a hold display will be described below as a target hold TH. As shown in FIG. 12B, the target hold T
When H is generated and displayed on the total hold storage display unit 18c, the first character image 91 as a suggestion image is displayed. The first character image 91 has a humanoid shape and is displayed in a mode having an image indicated by an arrow in the right hand.

From the state of FIG. 12B, the action effect of the first pattern shown in FIG. 12C is executed during the execution of the variation display immediately before the variation display of the target hold TH is started. In the action effect of the first pattern, the effect of throwing the arrow image held by the first displayed first character image 91 toward the target hold TH is executed. However, as shown in FIG. 12 (c), the arrow image does not reach the target hold TH and stalls in the middle without acting on the target hold TH. In this way, the action effect of the first pattern of Gase, in which the action effect is executed but the pending change does not actually occur, is shown in FIGS. 12 (b) and 12 (c).

Further, from the state of FIG. 12 (a), as shown in FIG. 12 (d), the second character image 9 as a suggestion image that the target hold TH is generated and displayed on the total hold storage display unit 18c.
2 is displayed. The second character image 92 is humanoid and is displayed in a mode having an image indicated by an arrow in the right hand, and is different in color from, for example, the first character image 91.

From the state of FIG. 12D, the action effect of the second pattern shown in FIG. 12E is executed during the execution of the variation display immediately before the variation display of the target hold TH is started. In the action effect of the second pattern, the effect of throwing the arrow image held by the first displayed second character image 92 toward the target hold TH is executed. As shown in FIG. 12 (e), the arrow image acts on the hold display by being stuck in the target hold TH, and the display mode of the target hold TH changes from the normal white color (white circle in the figure) to the jackpot expectation degree. It changes to a high red color (black circle in the figure). By changing the display mode of the target hold TH, it is possible to expect that the hold display will be a big hit.

Further, from the state of FIG. 12A, as shown in FIG. 12F, the first character image 9 as a suggestion image that the target hold TH is generated and displayed on the total hold storage display unit 18c.
1 is displayed.

From the state of FIG. 12 (f), the action effect of the third pattern shown in FIG. 12 (g) is executed during the execution of the variation display immediately before the variation display of the target hold TH is started. In the action effect of the third pattern, the first character image 91 to the second character image 9 are performed in a predetermined period until the effect of throwing the arrow image by the first displayed first character image 91 is executed.
The character image changes to 2. Specifically, the first character image 91 to the second character image 9 are being executed during the execution of the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display of the target hold TH is started.
The character image changes to 2. Then, the second character image 92 is the target hold T.
The effect of throwing the arrow image that was held toward H is executed. As shown in FIG. 12 (g), the arrow image acts on the hold display by being stuck in the target hold TH, and the display mode of the target hold TH changes from the normal white color (white circle in the figure) to the jackpot expectation degree. It changes to a high red color (black circle in the figure).

An example of setting the above-mentioned action effect will be described below. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a pending change mode determination table. In the hold change mode determination table, it is determined whether or not to perform the hold change, and when the hold change is performed, whether the display mode of the hold display is blue, green, or red. The hold change mode determination table includes the jackpot hold change mode determination table shown in FIG. 13 (A) and the out-of-order hold change mode determination table shown in FIG. 13 (B). Each of these pending change mode determination tables is stored in ROM 102.

The jackpot pending change mode determination table of FIG. 13A is used when it is determined that the variation display result of the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is the jackpot display result. FIG. 13 (B)
The holding change mode determination table at the time of deviation is used when it is determined that the variation display result of the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is the deviation display result.

In each of the pending change mode determination tables of FIGS. 13 (A) and 13 (B), a total of 110 numerical values of random numbers SR2 (numerical range of 0 to 110) for determining the pending change mode are determined to be unchanged (white). ,
It is assigned to the blue decision, the green decision, and the red decision. For SR2, the number of allocated random numbers is shown for the sake of clarity.

In the big hit hold change mode determination table of FIG. 13 (A), the random number SR2 for determining the hold mode
The data is set so that the selection ratio of the magnitude relationship of "no change (white) <blue <green <red" depends on the value of. Further, in the hold change mode determination table at the time of disconnection in FIG. 13 (B), the selection ratio of the magnitude relationship of "no change (white)>blue>green>red" is set according to the value of the random number SR2 for determining the hold mode. Data is set in.

By setting the data as shown in FIG. 13, the data is set so that the rate at which the hold change effect is executed at the time of a big hit is higher than that at the time of the loss. In addition, at the time of a big hit, it is easy to hold and change so that the relationship of magnitude is "blue <green <red" as compared with the case of a hit. Therefore,
When the pending change is executed, the jackpot expectation is high in this order.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a hold change effect determination table and a Gase effect determination table. 14 (A) and 14 (B) show a pending change effect determination table at the time of big hit and at the time of off. FIG. 14C shows a Gase production determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 102.

The jackpot pending change effect determination table of FIG. 14A is used when it is determined that the variation display result of the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is the jackpot display result. FIG. 14 (B
) On hold change effect determination table is used when it is determined that the variation display result of the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is the deviation display result. Further, the Gase effect determination table of FIG. 14 (C) shows whether or not to execute the Gase effect when it is determined in FIG. 13 (B) that there is no pending change, and when the Gase effect is executed. It is used when deciding the content.

In each of the hold change effect determination tables of FIGS. 14 (A) and 14 (B), a total of 100 numerical values of random numbers SR3 (numerical range of 0 to 100) for determining the content of the hold change effect determine the normal hold change effect. The first pattern action effect is determined, the second pattern action effect is determined, and the third pattern action effect is determined. Further, in the Gase effect determination table of FIG. 14 (C), a total of 100 numerical values of the random number SR3 (numerical range of 0 to 100) for determining the content of the Gase effect are determined without the Gase effect and the first of the Gase. It is allocated to the determination of the pattern action effect, the determination of the second pattern action effect of Gase, and the determination of the third pattern action effect of Gase. For SR3, the number of allocated random numbers is shown for the sake of clarity.

In the big hit hold change effect determination table of FIG. 14A, the random number S for determining the hold change effect
Depending on the value of R3, the data is set so that the selection ratio of the magnitude relationship of "normal hold change effect <first pattern action effect <second pattern action effect <third pattern action effect". Further, in the out-of-hold change effect determination table of FIG. 13B, "normal hold change effect> first pattern action effect> second pattern action effect> third pattern is determined by the value of the random number SR3 for determining the hold change effect. The data is set so as to be the selection ratio of the magnitude relation called "action effect".

Further, in the Gase effect determination table of FIG. 14C, depending on the value of the random number SR3 for determining the Gase effect, "No Gase effect <1st pattern action effect (Gase) <2nd pattern action effect (Gase) <3rd The data is set so as to be the selection ratio of the magnitude relation called "pattern action effect (gase)".

By setting the data as shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B, the data is set so that at the time of a big hit, the rate at which the hold change effect accompanied by the action effect is executed is higher than that at the time of the loss. Is set. In addition, at the time of a big hit, the content of the hold change effect is more likely to be determined so that there is a magnitude relationship of "normal hold change effect <first pattern action effect <second pattern action effect <third pattern action effect" as compared with the case of a miss. .. Therefore, when the hold change effect is executed, the expectation of a big hit is high in this order.

In addition, by setting the data as shown in FIGS. 14 (B) and 14 (C), the first
The pattern action effect, the second pattern action effect, and the third pattern action effect are likely to be executed in the ratio of the first pattern action effect <second pattern action effect <third pattern action effect. In addition, it is more difficult for the second pattern action effect to be executed than for the first pattern action effect. In addition, it is more difficult for the third pattern action effect to be executed than for the first pattern action effect. That is, the hold display is more likely to change when the second pattern action effect is executed than the first pattern action effect, and the hold display is displayed when the third pattern action effect is executed rather than the first pattern action effect. Easy to change. The rate of change in the hold display is high in the order of first pattern action effect <second pattern action effect <third pattern action effect. More specifically, in the first pattern action effect, the hold display changes at 30 / (30 + 20) = about 60%, and in the second pattern action effect, the hold display changes at 20 / (20 + 10) = about 66%. However, in the third pattern action effect, the hold display changes at 10 / (10 + 1) = about 90%.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an effect execution timing determination table in a tabular format. The effect execution timing determination table is a table for determining the execution timing of various effects such as the hold change effect. The various effects include the normal hold change effect described with reference to FIG. 16, the action effect of the first to third patterns, and the gase effect of the first to third patterns. The effect execution timing determination table is stored in the ROM 102.

The effect timing determination table of FIG. 15 shows the execution timings of various effects when the total number of pending items is 1 to 8. In this embodiment, the variable display is executed in order by digesting the hold storage (hold information) displayed on the total hold storage display unit 18c in order from the leftmost hold storage. When the hold display based on the leftmost hold memory is cleared, the hold display based on the next variation is displayed on the leftmost side. In this way, the hold display moves (shifts) to the next hold display area at a predetermined timing. The execution timing of the various effects is the timing during the variable display that is executed after the hold display is shifted. Therefore,
The timing at which various effects are executed is determined by the relationship between the current total number of pending storages and the number of shifts of the pending display. The numbers shown in the table of FIG. 15 indicate which timing is the timing for executing various effects as a percentage for each total number of pending storages, and is "-".
Indicates that various effects are not executed at this timing.

For example, when the total number of hold storages is 3, the execution timing of various effects is 30% when the hold display shifts from 3 to 2, and 70% when the hold display shifts from 2 to 1. Various productions are performed. When the total number of hold storages is 2, various effects are executed at a 100% execution rate when the hold display shifts from 2 to 1. As shown in FIG. 15, the execution timing of various effects is set so that the closer to the timing from the start of the variable display of the target, the higher the execution rate. In addition, it should be noted
The execution timing of the effect may be different between the normal hold change effect and the action effect. Further, the execution timing of various effects may be different depending on whether the result is a big hit display result or a missed display result.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead advance notice process. In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning command buffer is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit formed in the RAM 103. The start winning command receive command buffer is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1" to "8") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "8") of the total number of reserved storages.

When there is a start prize in the 1st start winning opening 13 or the 2nd starting winning opening 14, a symbol designation command, a variable type command, a start winning designation command (1st or 2nd start winning designation command), and a total hold A set of four commands called a storage number designation command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 stores the data specifying the commands in the order received at the time of the start winning from the beginning in the free area of the reception command buffer at the time of the start winning. The free area of the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning, that is, the data in the area where the data is not stored is "0000 (H)". At the time of starting prize, symbol designation command, variation type command, start winning designation command (1st, 2nd)
, And the command for specifying the total number of pending memories is sent in this order. Therefore,
If the command is received normally, the symbol specification command, the variation type command, the start prize specification command, and the total hold storage number specification command are placed in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers "1" to "8" in this order. It will be stored.

In the look-ahead advance notice process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks the stored contents in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning in order to confirm whether the newly received command is the latest command, and the total pending memory number specification command. , And whether or not the variation type command (command for specifying the variation pattern type at the time of starting winning) is received (S50).
1). If these commands are not in the latest area of the start winning command buffer (the area of the start winning command buffer that stores the latest received command (latest command)), the process ends. (N of S501). On the other hand, if these commands are received (Y in S501), it is determined whether or not the change effect restriction flag is set (S502). The change effect restriction flag is a flag set in the process of S512 described later, and when an effect related to changing the hold display including the Gase effect is executed, a new start prize is won after that. Is a flag for restricting the execution of the change effect even when is generated. When the change effect restriction flag is set, the process ends (Y in S502).

When the change effect restriction flag is not set (N in S502), it is determined whether or not the total number of the current pending storage numbers is 2 or more (S503). The total number of current pending memories is 2
Whether or not it is the above is determined by the value of the total pending storage number specification command. If the total number of currently held storages is not 2 or more, the process ends (N in S503). In this embodiment,
Since various effects are executed after the start (at the time of start) of the fluctuation display next to the fluctuation display currently being executed, it is necessary that the total number of reserved storages is 2 or more. It should be noted that not only one fluctuation display period executed when the total number of reserved memories is one, but also various effects when the fluctuation time is shortened, such as when the time is controlled to be shortened. Since there is a possibility that sufficient time may not be taken to execute the above, it is possible to secure time for executing various effects when the total number of reserved storages is 2 or more. However, when the fluctuation time is long, various effects may be executed even if the total number of reserved storages is less than 2.

When the total number of the current hold storages is 2 or more (Y in S503), it is determined whether or not the new hold storage is the reach variation pattern type (S504). Whether or not the new hold storage is the reach variation pattern type is determined based on the variation type command stored in the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. Specifically, for example, if the numerical range of random 2 shown in FIG. 6B is a variation type command based on the variation pattern type within the range of 180 to 251, it is determined to be reach. If the new hold storage is not the reach variation pattern type, the process ends (N in S504). When the new hold memory is the variation pattern type of reach (Y in S504), it is determined whether or not the new hold memory is a big hit (S505). Whether or not the new hold memory is a big hit is determined based on the variable type command and the symbol specification command.

In S505, when the new hold memory is determined to be a big hit (Y in S505),
SR2 is extracted, the hold change mode is determined by the jackpot hold change mode determination table shown in FIG. 13 (A) (S506), and the process proceeds to S507.

In S507, it is determined whether or not the mode of the pending change determined in S506 changes on hold. When it is determined that the pending change does not occur as the mode of the pending change, the process ends (N in S507). On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold change is made (Y in S507), the content of the hold change effect is determined by the jackpot hold change effect determination table shown in FIG. 14 (A) (S508).
It shifts to the process of 509.

When it is determined in S505 that the new hold memory is not a big hit (S505)
N) and SR2 are extracted, the pending change mode is determined by the off-hold change mode determination table shown in FIG. 13 (B) (S514), and the process proceeds to S515.

In S515, it is determined whether or not the mode of the pending change determined in S514 changes on hold (S515). When it is determined that the pending change is a mode of the pending change (Y in S515)
, The content of the hold change effect is determined by the off-hold change effect determination table shown in FIG. 14 (B) (S516), and the process proceeds to S509.

In S509, it is determined whether or not the effect determined in S508 or S516 is an action effect (S509). When executing the action effect (Y in S509), a character image as a suggestion image is displayed (S510). Then, the process proceeds to S511. On the other hand, when the action effect is not executed (N in S509), the hold change effect is normally executed, so S5.
The process shifts to the process of S511 without executing the process of 10. In S511, the change effect restriction flag is set, and the process proceeds to S512. The change effect restriction flag is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit.

In S512, the execution timings of various effects are determined by the effect execution timing determination table shown in FIG. 15 (S512), and the determined contents are stored in the storage area (effect control buffer setting unit) provided in the RAM 103 (S513). ), End the process.

Further, in S515, when it is determined that the mode of the pending change determined in S514 does not change on hold (N in S515), the content of the Gase effect is determined by the Gase effect determination table shown in FIG. 14 (C). (S517). Next, it is determined whether or not to execute the action effect (gase) (S518). When executing the action effect (Gase) (Y of S518), S51
It shifts to the process of 0. On the other hand, in S518, when the action effect (gase) is not executed (
N) of S518, the process is terminated.

When the change effect restriction flag is set in S502 of FIG. 16, it is controlled not to execute the subsequent processing. In this way, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the action effect using the character image as the suggestion image.

Further, as shown in S510 and S512 of FIG. 16, after displaying the character image, FIG. 1
From the effect execution timing determination table of 5, the period spanning a plurality of variable displays is determined as the period of the action effect. In this way, the player can be noticed during a period of a plurality of variable displays.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 1
With 00, hold display and active display are executed based on the hold storage information, and a plurality of timings (for example, hold display and active) during the hold display period and the variable display period corresponding to the target hold storage information are executed. When the change effect such as hold is executed at any of the timings (multiple timings during display), the type of display to be changed is
An example will be described in which the selection ratio of the timing for executing the display mode change differs depending on which of the first specific display mode and the second specific display mode is different from the normal display mode. Here, the hold or the like change effect is an effect that changes the display mode of the hold display or the active display. In addition, a variation display in which a change effect such as hold is executed may be referred to as a change effect execution variation such as hold.

In the second embodiment, when the reserved storage information is newly generated, any one of the predetermined display mode, the first specific display mode, and the second specific display mode is used as the image of the hold display and the active display. The image of the display mode is selected, and the selected image is displayed. For example, the predetermined display mode is a general "circular" shape display mode, the first specific display mode is an icon shape display mode using "characters" (also referred to as a character icon), and the second specific display mode is Is an icon-shaped display mode (also referred to as a "character icon") using an "character" composed of an "animal character".

In the second embodiment, when the hold storage information is newly generated, the image of the normal display mode, the image of the first specific display mode, and the first specific display mode are used as the hold display to appear by using the predetermined hold display selection table. 2 One of the images in the specific display mode is selected. For example, the first specific display mode,
In addition, the second specific display mode is set so that the ratio of selection when a big hit is made is higher than when the hit is lost.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a character icon selection table and a character icon selection table. A character icon selection table is shown in FIG. 17 (A), and a character icon selection table is shown in FIG. 17 (B).

In the second embodiment, the color of the image can be selected for the image in the normal display mode, and the color of the image can be changed by a change effect such as holding. Then, as shown in FIG. 17A, in the image of the first specific display mode, the character type can be selected from a plurality of types of characters, and the character type can be changed by a change effect such as holding. is there. Further, as shown in FIG. 17B, in the image of the second specific display mode, the type of the number of characters can be selected from the number of a plurality of types of characters, and the type of the number of characters can be selected by the change effect such as holding. It can be changed.

When the first specific display mode is selected as the hold display to be displayed, after the character icon (small display) showing the character "small" is displayed on the display at the time of appearance as shown in FIG. 17 (A). , The character icon is the character icon with the character "medium" as the first change display (
It can be changed to a character icon (large display) in which the character "large" is shown as the second change display). The relationship of small display <medium display <large display is set for the degree of expectation that the result of the variable display based on the corresponding hold storage information becomes the big hit display result.

Regarding the second embodiment, the circular hold display and the active display as the predetermined display mode, the character icon shape hold display and the active display as the first specific display mode, and the like.
An example of using the hold display and the active display of the character icon shape as the second specific display mode will be shown. An example will be described in which the selection ratio of the timing at which the display mode change of the specific display mode is executed differs depending on which of the first specific display mode and the second specific display mode is used.

In the second embodiment, the character icons used only for the active display are the hold display in the predetermined display mode (hold display in the shape of a circle), the hold display in the first specific display mode (hold display in the shape of the character icon), and the second. It may be possible to change from any of the hold display (character icon shape hold display) of the specific display mode. The character icons used only for the active display are the hold display of the predetermined display mode (circular hold display), the hold display of the first specific display mode (hold display of the character icon shape), and the second specific display mode. It may be possible to change only from any one of the hold display (character icon shape hold display).
The character icons used only for the active display are the hold display of the predetermined display mode (circular hold display), the hold display of the first specific display mode (hold display of the character icon shape), and the second specific display mode. It may be possible to change from any two of the hold display (character icon shape hold display) (for example, the first specific display and the second specific display mode).

When the second specific display mode is selected as the hold display to be made to appear, as shown in FIG. 17 (B), a character icon (one animal display) showing "one animal character" is displayed on the appearance display. After that, the character icon is a character icon (2 animals displayed) in which "2 animals" are shown as the first change display, or "3 animals" are shown as the second change display. It can be changed to a character icon (displaying 3 animals). The expectation that the result of the variable display based on the corresponding reserved memory information will be the jackpot display result is 1 animal display <
The relationship of 2 animals display <3 animals display is set.

FIG. 18 shows a display mode change effect execution timing selection process, a display mode change effect type selection process, and a change mode selection process when the hold display is determined to be an icon-shaped display mode such as a character icon or a character icon. These are various data tables used for the icon effect setting process to execute.

FIG. 18A is a character hold display change effect timing selection table used when the hold display is determined to be the display mode of the character icon. FIG. 18B is a character hold display change effect timing selection table used when the hold display is determined to be the display mode of the character icon. In FIGS. 18A and 18B, a random number value MR10 for determining the display mode change effect timing is assigned to the two types of display mode change effect timings, that is, the hold display and the active display.

In FIGS. 18A and 18B, when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, the display mode changes in the hold display compared to the active display as compared with the display mode of the character icon. The rate at which the production is executed is high. On the other hand, when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, the rate at which the display mode change effect is executed in the active display than in the hold display as compared with the case where the hold display is the display mode of the character icon. Is high. This will
The player can be focused on the display type (for example, the display type of a character icon or a character icon) and the timing of the display mode change (for example, the timing of pending display or active display) of the display mode change effect. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game with respect to the effect of changing the mode of the hold display.

Regarding the display of the character icon and the display of the character icon, as shown in FIGS. 18 (E) to 18 (L) described later, the rate at which the display mode actually changes after the display mode change effect is executed is held. Equal between medium and active display. Therefore, when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, the display mode change effect is executed at a higher rate in the hold display than in the active display as compared with the display mode of the character icon. When the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, the display mode change effect is executed at a higher rate during the active display than when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon. Based on, the frequency at which the icon display mode changes between the hold display and the active display differs depending on whether the hold display is displayed as a character icon display or a character icon display. The ratio of selecting whether to change the display mode is different between the hold display and the active display. As a result, with respect to the change in the display mode of the hold display displayed in the icon shape and the change in the display mode of the active display, the player can pay attention to the type of the display to be changed and the timing of the change in the display mode. It is possible to improve the interest of the game about the change of.

FIG. 18C is a character hold change effect type selection table used when the hold display is determined to be the display mode of the character icon. The types of change effects when the hold display by the character icon is executed are the first change effect in which the blue arrow acts on the hold display or active display, and the second change effect in which the red arrow acts on the hold display or active display. The change effect is provided so as to be selectable by allocating the random number value MR11 for selecting the display mode change effect type.

FIG. 18D is a character hold change effect type selection table used when the hold display is determined to be the display mode of the character icon. As the types of display mode change effects when the hold display by the character icon is executed, the blue arrow acts on the hold display or the active display, and the red arrow acts on the hold display or the active display. The fourth change effect is provided so as to be selectable by allocating the random number value MR11 for selecting the display mode change effect type.

18 (E) to 18 (H) show the effect of changing the hold display by the character icon.
This is a change selection table used when selecting and determining a change mode of icon display according to a combination of a display mode change effect timing and a display mode change effect type selected and determined by the data tables of A) and FIG. 18 (B).

When it is decided to execute the first change effect during the hold display, the table of FIG. 18 (E) is used. When it is decided to execute the first change effect during the active display
The table of FIG. 18F is used. When it is decided to execute the second change effect during the hold display, the table of FIG. 18 (G) is used. When it is decided to execute the second change effect during the active display, the table of FIG. 18 (H) is used. When it is decided to execute the third change effect during the hold display, the table of FIG. 18 (I) is used. When it is decided to execute the third change effect during the active display, FIG. 18 (J)
Table is used. When it is decided to execute the fourth change effect during the hold display, the table of FIG. 18 (K) is used. When it is decided to execute the fourth change effect during the active display, the table of FIG. 18 (L) is used.

In the change selection table of FIGS. 18 (E) to 18 (H), "no change", "medium" and "large" are displayed separately when the display result of the variation display is the jackpot display result and when the display result is the loss display result. In addition to the display, 100 random values MR12 (0 to 99) for selecting the change mode are allocated at different selection ratios. Further, in the change selection table of FIGS. 18 (I) to 18 (L), "no change" and "two animals" are displayed separately when the display result of the variation display is the jackpot display result and when the display result is the loss display result. And "3 animals" display, 10 of random value MR12 (0 to 99) for selection of change mode
0 pieces are allocated with different selection ratios.

In FIGS. 18 (E) to 18 (H), "no change" indicates a mode in which the character icon does not change, and "medium" display indicates a mode in which the character icon changes to the character icon "medium".
The "large" display indicates that the character icon changes to the icon of the character "large".

In FIGS. 18 (E) to 18 (H), when the random value MR12 for change selection is a jackpot display result, “no change <medium + large (changed)”, and when a loss display result is obtained, “no change”. ＞ Medium +
It is allocated according to the selection ratio of the relationship "large (changed)". In addition, FIGS. 18 (E) to 18 (H)
Then, "medium <large" when the big hit display result is obtained, and "medium>large" when the loss display result is obtained.
The random number value MR12 is assigned by the selection ratio of the relationship. As a result, when the character icon changes, the expectation that the jackpot display result is higher is higher than when the character icon does not change. Further, when the character icon changes to "large", the expectation that the big hit display result is higher is higher than when the character icon changes to "medium".

Regarding the character icon display, as shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, when the ratio of selecting the character icon display mode change during the active display is lower than that during the hold display, but the jackpot display result is obtained. In addition, the ratio of the display mode change of the "large" display, which has a higher level of expectation of a big hit than the "medium" display, is higher than that of the hold display during the active display. As a result, the player can pay more attention to the mode of changing the display mode of the icon display depending on the display type of the display mode change target and the selected change timing.

18 (I) to 18 (L) show the display mode change effect timing and display mode selected and determined by the data tables of FIGS. 18 (A) and 18 (B) for the display mode change effect of the hold display by the character icon. This is a change selection table used when selecting and determining a change mode of icon display according to a combination with a change effect type. In these effect selection tables, when the display result of the variable display becomes the jackpot display result and when it becomes the loss display result, "
Random value MR12 for change selection is assigned to "no change", "2 animals" display, and "3 animals" display at different selection ratios.

In FIGS. 18 (I) to 18 (L), "no change" indicates a mode in which the character icon does not change, and "2 animals" display indicates a mode in which the character icon changes to a "2 animals" icon. The "3 animals" display indicates that the character changes to the "3 animals" icon.

In FIGS. 18 (I) to 18 (L), the random number value MR12 is determined by the selection ratio of "2 animals <3 animals" when the jackpot display result is obtained and "2 animals> 3 animals" when the loss display result is obtained. It has been allocated. As a result, when the character icon changes, the degree of expectation that the jackpot display result is higher is higher than when the character icon does not change. In addition, the character icon is "3
When the character icon changes to "2 animals", the expectation that the big hit display result is higher is higher than when the character icon changes to "2 animals".

Regarding the character icon display, as shown in FIGS. 18 (B) and 18 (C), the ratio of selecting the character icon display mode change during the hold display is lower than that during the active display.
When the jackpot display result is obtained, the rate at which the display mode change of "3 animals" display, which has a higher expectation level of jackpot than "2 animals" display, is selected as compared with the active display during hold display. Is high. As a result, the player can pay more attention to the mode of changing the display mode of the icon display by the display type of the display mode change target and the selected change timing for the hold display and the active display.

Next, the main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) As shown in FIGS. 12 (f) and 12 (g), the first character image 91 is displayed by the time the action effect is executed, and the character images are displayed in the first character image 91 to the second character image 92. The display mode can be changed. In this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the process before executing the action effect.

(2) As shown in FIGS. 12 (f) and 12 (g), the first character image 91 is displayed before the action effect is executed, and the character images are displayed from the first character image 91 to the second character image 92. The mode can be changed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B, at the time of big hit, it is easier to select the third pattern for changing the display mode of the character image than at the time of losing. In this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the process before executing the action effect.

(3) When the change effect restriction flag is set in S502 of FIG. 16,
It is controlled not to execute the subsequent processing. In this way, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the action effect using the character image as the suggestion image.

(4) As shown in FIGS. 12 (b) and 12 (c), the first pattern in which the first character image 91 is displayed and then the arrow is inserted into the hold display, and as shown in FIGS. 12 (d) and 12 (e). The second pattern in which the second character image 92 is displayed and then the arrow is inserted into the hold display, and FIGS. 12 (f) and 12 (g).
), A third pattern is provided in which the first character image 91 is displayed, the image is changed to the second character image 92, and then the arrow is inserted into the hold display. If you do this
Multiple patterns can be executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(5) As shown in FIGS. 14 (B) and 14 (C), the second pattern is easier to execute the change effect than the first pattern (it is difficult to select the ghost effect), and the third pattern is more difficult to select than the first pattern. The pattern is easier to execute the change effect (it is difficult to select the Gase effect). In this way, the player can pay attention to which pattern is executed.

(6) As shown in S510 and S512 of FIG. 16, after displaying the character image, the period extending over a plurality of variable displays is determined as the period of the action effect by the effect execution timing determination table of FIG. In this way, the player can be noticed during a period of a plurality of variable displays.

(7) In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the character icon shape display mode has a high change effect execution rate during the hold display. Then, as shown in FIGS. 18 (E) to 18 (L), the rate at which the display mode actually changes when the change effect is executed is equal between the hold display and the active display. Therefore, depending on whether the character icon shape display mode or the animal character icon shape display mode is used, the frequency at which the icon display mode changes between the hold display and the active display differs between the hold display mode and the animal character icon shape display mode. The ratio of selecting whether to change the display mode is different between the active display and the active display. In this way, with respect to the change in the hold display mode and the change in the display mode corresponding to the change, the player can pay attention to the type of the display to be changed and the timing of the change in the display mode. You can improve your interest.

Next, modification examples, feature points, and the like of the embodiments described above are listed below.
(1) In the above-described embodiment, the degree of expectation that the hold display changes may differ depending on the period from the display of the character image to the execution of the action effect. Specifically, the longer the period from the display of the character image to the execution of the action effect, the more easily the hold display may change. That is, the longer the period until the action effect is executed, the more difficult it may be to execute the Gase effect. In this way, it is possible to pay attention to the period from the display of the character image as the suggestion image to the execution of the action effect. On the contrary, the shorter the period from the display of the character image to the execution of the action effect, the more easily the hold display may change.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the character image as the suggestion image changes as the third pattern in which the action effect is executed has been described. However, the number of suggested images may be increased instead of changing the suggested images. Specifically, the number of character images may be increased to two or three by the time the character image of one person is displayed first and the action effect is executed. In addition, the expected degree of change in the hold display and the expected degree of jackpot may differ depending on the timing at which the suggested images increase.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the action effect or the like is executed for the hold display has been described. However, the action effect or the like may be executed for the active display instead of the hold display. Further, the action effect may be executed in both the hold display and the active display. Further, the suggestion image may be displayed at the stage of the hold display, and the action effect may be executed after the hold display is shifted to the active display.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the normal hold change effect has a lower expectation of a big hit than the action effect. However, the normal hold change effect may be set so that the jackpot expectation is higher than the action effect. Further, although the normal hold change effect has been described as changing the color of the hold display at the time of shifting, the display mode of the hold display may be changed by the character acting on the hold display.

(5) In the above-described embodiment, the one with high expectation that the hold display changes in the order of the first pattern action effect <second pattern action effect <third pattern action effect has been described. However, the change expectation of the hold display may be the same for all patterns, and the change expectation may be set to be higher when the character image as a suggestion image does not change than when it changes.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, the action effect may be executed in a period spanning a plurality of fluctuations of the pseudo-ream. Here, the pseudo-ream is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed, although it is originally a one-time fluctuation corresponding to one reserved memory. Abbreviation for continuous fluctuation. In general, such a pseudo-ream has a higher expectation of a big hit as the number of re-variations of the pseudo-ream (the number of times the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and then re-variated) is increased. By displaying the suggestion image over a predetermined period in which such a pseudo-revariation is executed, the longer the predetermined period, the higher the expectation of change in the display mode of the active display when the action effect is executed. You may do so. It should be noted that the suggestion image may be displayed in the pseudo-continuous effect, and the action effect may be executed for the hold display instead of the active display displayed when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

(7) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the character image as the suggestion image displayed when the action effect is executed changes by only one step has been described. However, the suggestion image may be changed in a plurality of stages such as two stages and three stages. Further, when changing, the change may be performed in two steps at a time, or the change in one step may be executed twice. Further, the change expectation may be higher in the change of two or more steps than in the change of one step. Further, the change expectation may be higher when the change is performed in two steps at a time than when the change in one step is executed twice, or vice versa.

(8) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which, when the display mode of the hold display does not change due to the action effect, the display result is always off. However, even when the action effect is executed and the effect that the arrow does not stick in the hold display is executed, the jackpot display result may be obtained. For example, even if the effect that the arrow does not stick to the hold display is executed when the action effect is executed, if the reach is reached after the change of the target hold display is started,
The degree of expectation that the jackpot display result may be high may be increased. Further, the jackpot expectation degree in this case may be higher than that in the case where the action effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed.

(9) In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of types of suggestion image change timings may be provided. Further, the expected degree of change of the hold display may be different depending on the change timing of the suggested image. Specifically, the longer the period from the display of the suggestion image to the change of the suggestion image, the higher the expectation of change in the hold display may be. Further, the shorter the period from the display of the suggestion image to the change of the suggestion image, the higher the expectation of change in the hold display may be.

(10) In the above-described embodiment, the mode of action production may differ depending on the type of suggestion image. For example, when the first character image is displayed as the character image as the suggestion image, the arrow of the first character image is displayed in the form of a thin arrow, and when the second character image is displayed, the second character image is displayed. The arrow in the character image of
It may be displayed in the form of an arrow thicker than the arrow of the first character image.

(11) In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of types of combinations of the suggestion image and the action effect may be provided. Then, depending on the type of combination of the suggestion image and the action effect, the degree of expectation that the hold display or the active display changes, and the degree of expectation of a big hit when the change of the hold display or the active display is successful may be different.

(12) In the various effects shown in the above-described embodiment, medals are inserted, a predetermined number of bets are set, a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player stops. If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols in the display means are stopped in response to the operation of a button, the application is applied to a slot machine (slot machine) in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. Is also possible. In slot machines, bonuses such as big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB), AT that executes an effect to notify the result of the internal lottery, and R with a different winning probability of the re-game combination compared to the normal game state.
The above-mentioned various effects may be executed as the effects indicating the control to the ART shifted to T, AT and RT. For example, the hold display or the active display is displayed when the AT or the like is won (including the disappointment effect in the case of a loss), and the above-mentioned action effect is executed for the hold display or the active display. May be good.

(13) In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot gaming state has been described as a representative example as an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. However, not limited to this, the advantageous states that are advantageous to the player may include other advantageous states such as a high probability state (probability variation state), a time saving state, and a high base state.

(14) In the above-described embodiment, the substrate on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted is used.
Although the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided, a circuit for controlling the effect device may be mounted on one board. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and other effect devices (display control board).
Two boards may be provided with a second effect control board on which a circuit for controlling a lamp, an LED, a speaker 27R, 27L, etc.) is mounted.

(15) In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 uses another substrate (for example, the drawing). For the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, etc. shown in 3, or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). The effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 by executing control related to voice control and lamp control according to the operation, and further changing the received command to the command as it is or, for example, a simplified command. It may be sent to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment, and similarly, the sound output board 70 and the lamp driver. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board. In the case of such a configuration, the effect control microcomputer 100 may similarly make various decisions made by the effect control microcomputer 100 in the above-described embodiment, or
A control means such as an audio output board 70, a lamp driver board 35, or a microcomputer mounted on a sound / lamp board may perform the operation.

(16) In the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer of the variation time and the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the type of reach effect and the presence / absence of pseudo-ream.
Although an example of transmitting one variation pattern command when starting variation is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer uses the first command to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-ream, whether or not there is a slip effect, etc., before reaching (
If it does not reach, a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the so-called second stop is sent, and with the second command, the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. are sent after the reach (before the second stop).
If it does not reach, a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode (after the so-called second stop) may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform the effect control in the variation display based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. In addition, the game control microcomputer notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the production control microcomputer selects the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. May be good. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has passed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command can be reduced. In the configuration in which the fluctuation pattern is notified to the effect control microcomputer by the two commands in this way, in the second command after the first command is transmitted, the judgment result of the display result by the effect processing at the time of winning, Then, the look-ahead determination information such as the variation pattern type may be transmitted, and the pre-reading notice effect may be executed based on the reception of the second command. Here, the pseudo-ream is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed, although it is originally a one-time fluctuation corresponding to one reserved memory. Abbreviation for continuous fluctuation. Further, slipping refers to an effect display in which the symbol is slid from the predicted stop position immediately before the symbol is stopped in the variable display.

(17) The above-described embodiment can also be applied to a device such as a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko game machine 1. The program and data for realizing the above-described embodiment are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided to the computer device or the like by the detachable recording medium, and the storage device of the computer device or the like in advance. You may take the form of distribution by pre-installing on. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter. Further, the embodiment of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be a form of directly executing using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

(18) As an embodiment of this embodiment, a game machine in which the game medium is paid out to the player's hand when a prize is generated has been described. However, the game medium is enclosed and the game medium is delivered to the player when a prize is generated. An enclosed game machine that adds game points (scores) without paying out at hand may be adopted. The enclosed game machine has a circulation path for circulating a plurality of balls, which is an example of a game medium, in the game machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing game points, depending on the ball lending operation. The game points are added to the storage unit, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the ball firing operation, and the game points are added to the storage unit when a prize is generated.

(19) In the above-described embodiment, for example, a case is shown in which a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols of "1" to "9" are variablely displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the symbol to be variablely displayed and the symbol to be derived and displayed do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variablely displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to display a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol is derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

(20) In the above-described embodiment, a predetermined value exceeding 0% as the “ratio (ratio, probability)” has been described as a specific example. However, the "ratio (ratio, probability)" is 0.
May be%. For example, when the occurrence rate of the predetermined game state 1 and the occurrence rate of the other game state 2 in the predetermined game period are compared and it is determined that "one occurrence rate is higher than the other occurrence rate". , The case where the occurrence rate of one of the gaming states is 0% is also included.

(21) In the above-described embodiment, after the variation display result when it is determined that the display result of the variation display is the probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed, the probability variation state is unconditionally changed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. An example of controlled probability change state control is shown. However, not limited to this, when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 20, the probability change determining device is controlled to the probability change state. A type of probabilistic state control may be performed.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. In addition, the specific configuration is
In addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples described later, any changes or additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above and below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is another gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player by displaying fluctuations. hand,
Specific display means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, processing of S707 in FIG. 10, etc.) capable of displaying specific display (hold display, active display, etc.) of variable display, and
The suggestion image (first character image 91, second character image 92, etc.) related to the change in the display mode of the specific display is displayed in the display area of the specific display (total hold storage display unit 18c, etc. in FIG. 12).
Suggestion image display means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) that can be displayed in a different area (area at the lower right of the effect display device 9 shown in FIG. 12), and
An action effect of changing the display mode of the specific display by causing the suggestion image to act on the specific display (as shown in FIGS. 12 (c), (e), and (g), an effect of inserting an arrow into the hold display, etc. ), And an action effect execution means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.)
Electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitting body units 9071 to 9074, a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, a right frame LED 909c, and movable members 9051 to 905.
Control means for controlling the operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating 4 (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90120), and
An output means (for example, an output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving an electric component according to a control signal by a serial communication method from the control means. , Light emitter driver 90411, Motor drive driver 90
412, with illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c)
The output means sets the output state when the input control signal is output to another output means as a first output state in which a waveform rises according to a predetermined mode (for example, a normal slew rate output state (see FIG. 32 (1)). )) And the second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode of change that is slower than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 32 (2))). It is possible (for example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), it is set to a normal slew rate output, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), it is set to a low slew rate output (FIG. 31). reference)),
Other output means are provided in the same substrate as the output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 25, a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, and the control signals emit the same light emission. (Sequentially transmitted between illuminant drivers on the body control board 9016C),
The output means is set to the second output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 35).
In the illuminant driver 90411 mounted on the illuminant control board 9016C, the S terminal is set to H (high) and the output state is set to a low slew rate),
The suggestion image display means can change the display mode of the suggestion image during the period from the display of the suggestion image to the execution of the action effect (shown in FIGS. 12 (f) and 12 (g)). As described above, a game machine characterized in that the display mode of the character image can be changed to the second character image 92 after the first character image 91 is displayed before the action effect is executed).

The gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player by displaying fluctuations.
Specific display means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, processing of S707 in FIG. 10, etc.) capable of displaying specific display (hold display, active display, etc.) of variable display, and
The suggestion image (first character image 91, second character image 92, etc.) related to the change in the display mode of the specific display is displayed in the display area of the specific display (total hold storage display unit 18c, etc. in FIG. 12).
Suggestion image display means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) that can be displayed in a different area (area at the lower right of the effect display device 9 shown in FIG. 12), and
An action effect of changing the display mode of the specific display by causing the suggestion image to act on the specific display (as shown in FIGS. 12 (c), (e), and (g), an effect of inserting an arrow into the hold display, etc. ), And an action effect execution means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.)
Electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitting body units 9071 to 9074, a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, a right frame LED 909c, and movable members 9051 to 905.
Control means for controlling the operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating 4 (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90120), and
An output means (for example, an output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving an electric component according to a control signal by a serial communication method from the control means. , Light emitter driver 90411, Motor drive driver 90
412, with illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c)
The output means sets the output state when the input control signal is output to another output means as a first output state in which a waveform rises according to a predetermined mode (for example, a normal slew rate output state (see FIG. 32 (1)). )) And the second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode of change that is slower than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 32 (2))). It is possible (for example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), it is set to a normal slew rate output, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), it is set to a low slew rate output (FIG. 31). reference)),
Another output means is provided on another board connected to the board on which the output means is provided via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable or a wire harness) (for example, shown in FIG. 29 (2)). As described above, the illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different illuminant control boards 9016D to 9016F, and the illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the illuminant control boards 9016D to 9016F having different control signals.
Sequentially transmitted between),
The output means is set to the first output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 37).
Light emitter drivers 90413a to 9 mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F
In 0413c, the S terminal is set to L (low) and is set to the normal slew rate output state),
The suggestion image display means can change the display mode of the suggestion image during the period from the display of the suggestion image to the execution of the action effect (shown in FIGS. 12 (f) and 12 (g)). As described above, a game machine characterized in that the display mode of the character image can be changed to the second character image 92 after the first character image 91 is displayed before the action effect is executed).

According to these game machines, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the process before executing the action effect. In addition, the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be improved. In addition, if an unintended effect is generated due to noise during the game, the player may feel discomfort or distrust. However, since the above-mentioned game machine has high noise immunity of the control signal, the occurrence of the unintended effect is high. Can be suppressed with. This leads to the reliability of the game machine. In particular, with regard to the action effect, the change in the display mode may arouse the expectation of the player or attract the attention of the player. However, it is possible to highly suppress the occurrence of an unintended display in such an effect. You can get the effect that you can improve the interest of.

Further, examples of the gaming machine capable of increasing the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction include the following gaming machines (a) and (b).
(A) Electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, a right frame LED 909c, and a movable member 9051.
Control means (for example, production control microcomputer 90120) for controlling the operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating ~ 9054, and
An output means (for example, an output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving an electric component according to a control signal by a serial communication method from the control means. , Light emitter driver 90411, Motor drive driver 90
412, with illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c)
The output means sets the output state when the input control signal is output to another output means as a first output state in which a waveform rises according to a predetermined mode (for example, a normal slew rate output state (see FIG. 32 (1)). )) And the second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode of change that is slower than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 32 (2))). It is possible (for example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), it is set to a normal slew rate output, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), it is set to a low slew rate output (FIG. 31). reference)),
Other output means are provided in the same substrate as the output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 25, a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, and the control signals emit the same light emission. (Sequentially transmitted between illuminant drivers on the body control board 9016C),
The output means is set to the second output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 35, the S terminal is H (high) in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is set to a low slew rate output state).
(B) Electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, a right frame LED 909c, and a movable member 9051.
Control means (for example, production control microcomputer 90120) for controlling the operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating ~ 9054, and
An output means (for example, an output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving an electric component according to a control signal by a serial communication method from the control means. , Light emitter driver 90411, Motor drive driver 90
412, with illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c)
The output means sets the output state when the input control signal is output to another output means as a first output state in which a waveform rises according to a predetermined mode (for example, a normal slew rate output state (see FIG. 32 (1)). )) And the second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode of change that is slower than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 32 (2))). It is possible (for example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), it is set to a normal slew rate output, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), it is set to a low slew rate output (FIG. 31). reference)),
Another output means is provided on another board connected to the board on which the output means is provided via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable or a wire harness) (for example, shown in FIG. 29 (2)). As described above, the illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different illuminant control boards 9016D to 9016F, and the illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the illuminant control boards 9016D to 9016F having different control signals.
Sequentially transmitted between),
The output means is set to the first output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 37, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 904 mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F).
In 13c, the S terminal is set to L (low) and is set to the output state of a normal slew rate).
Hereinafter, form examples of these gaming machines will be described as other form examples.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, other form examples will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 19 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment, showing the layout of the main members. In FIG. 19, the effect movable mechanism 9050, which will be described later, is shown by a broken line. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 901 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 902 and a game board 902 that constitute the game board surface.
It is composed of a game machine frame (underframe) 903 that supports and fixes the above. The game board 902 is formed with a game area surrounded by guide rails and having a substantially circular outer edge. A game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device into this game area and is driven into the game area.

A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 19, the lower right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are each composed of, for example, a 7-segment or dot matrix LED (light emitting diode), and are identified in a special symbol game as an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special symbol"), which is a plurality of types of possible identification information (special identification information), is variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B can variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", respectively. To do. In the following, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as the "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B is referred to as the "second special symbol".
Also called.

A main image display device 905MA is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 902. The main image display device 905MA is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. Main image display device 905
On the screen of the MA, for example, 3 corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special symbol game. In the decorative symbol display area, which is a plurality of variable display units such as one, decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can identify each of them, are variably displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, "left", "middle", arranged in the display area of the main image display device 905MA,
In the "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the corresponding decorative symbols are variably displayed. In this case, in the special figure game, the first special symbol display device 904A
Each of "left", "middle", and "right" corresponding to the start of either the change of the first special figure due to the above or the change of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B. Decorative pattern display area 9
At 05L, 905C, and 905R, the variation of the decorative pattern (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. After that, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C,
At 905R, the final decorative symbol (final stop symbol), which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed.

As described above, on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, the first special symbol display device 90
In synchronization with the special figure game using the first special figure in 4A or the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified by each are variable. The display is performed, and the definite decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "deriving"). For example, to derive and display various display symbols such as special symbols and decorative symbols means to display identification information such as decorative symbols as a stop display (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and end the variable display. .. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol becomes "0" and the decoration is displayed. The design may be stagnant and displayed, and may be in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction, for example. Such a display state is also called "temporary stop display", and although the display result in the variable display is not definitively displayed, the player indicates that the change of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display has not progressed. It becomes recognizable. It should be noted that the temporary stop display does not cause slight shaking or expansion / contraction, and the decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed in a period until a short stop time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses. May be included.

The decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" or Chinese numbers. It may be an English character, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and a character image, and the character image may be, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, or an object other than these. It may be composed of a symbol such as a character or a decorative image showing any other figure). Each of the decorative symbols has a corresponding symbol number. For example, for each alphanumeric character indicating "1" to "8", "1"
The symbol numbers from "" to "8" are attached. The number of decorative patterns is not limited to eight, and may be any number (for example, seven or nine) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination and a losing combination can be configured.

After the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, until the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 90 of "left", "middle", and "right" are displayed.
In 5R, for example, when a scroll display is performed so as to flow from top to bottom in order from a small symbol number to a large symbol number, and a decorative symbol having the maximum symbol number (for example, "8") is displayed. Subsequently, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, "1") is displayed.
Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, the decorative symbol display area 5L on the "left"), scroll display is performed from the one with the larger symbol number to the one with the smaller symbol number to display the symbol. When the decorative symbol having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative symbol having the largest number may be displayed subsequently.

The decorative symbol is not limited to the one that is variably displayed as a plurality of types of identification information, and the image display device 905 (main image display device 9) corresponds to the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game.
Any effect image may be displayed on the screen of 05MA or a sub-image display device 905SU described later). For example, on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, it may be possible to execute an effect of displaying the result of the story according to the variable display result of the special symbol by displaying the effect image having a story. As an effect by displaying the effect image, for example, a professional wrestling or soccer match or a battle effect in which enemy or ally characters fight may be performed. Then, when the variable display result is "missing", the effect of losing the match or battle is performed. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit", the effect of winning the game or battle is performed. Alternatively, for example, on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, the display color change display and the stop display at a specific display portion are repeated. Then, when the variable display result is "missing", the stop display state is maintained with a predetermined display color (for example, white), or the predetermined display color is maintained in a hidden state. Derived display of decorative patterns. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit", the display color is different from the predetermined display color (
By maintaining the stopped display state (for example, red), the decorative pattern is derived and displayed. In this way, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, a predetermined (single) symbol may be switched between display and non-display, while the other symbols may be maintained in the non-display state. Then, as the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) that results in the variable display of the decorative symbol, any one of a plurality of types of symbols may be derived and displayed (final stop display). Further, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, the display and non-display of the effect image showing the predetermined pattern may be repeated so that the other effect images are not displayed. Then, as a variable display result of the decorative symbol, the effect image showing the predetermined symbol used for the variable display is not stopped and displayed, and the effect image showing a specific number or symbol different from the predetermined symbol is displayed. By being displayed, the decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

A start winning memory display area 905H is arranged on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. In the start winning prize storage display area 905H, a hold storage display is performed in which the number of hold of the variable display (the number of hold of the special figure) corresponding to the special figure game is identifiablely displayed. Here, in the hold of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game, the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B. It occurs based on the starting prize by (entering). That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously satisfied start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 901 is controlled to the jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Will be done.

For example, due to the occurrence of the first start prize in which the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening, the first
When the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure by the special symbol display device 904A is satisfied, the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition. If the first start condition for starting the game is not satisfied, the number of stored first special figures is incremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, due to the occurrence of the second start prize in which the game ball passes (enters) the second start prize opening, the second special symbol display device 904B
When the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is started. If the second start condition is not satisfied, the number of stored special figures on hold is incremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the number of stored special figures of the first special figure is decremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1.

The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also particularly referred to as a total hold memory number. The term "special figure reserved memory" usually refers to a concept that includes all of the first special figure reserved memory, the second special figure reserved memory, and the total reserved memory.
It may also refer to some of these (for example, a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

A display for displaying the number of reserved special figures may be provided together with the start winning prize memory display area 905H or in place of the start winning prize memory display 905H area. In the example shown in FIG. 19, together with the start winning prize storage display area 905H, the first hold for identifiable display of the number of special figure hold storages on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. A display device 9025A and a second hold display device 9025B are provided. The first hold indicator 9025A displays the number of hold storages of the first special figure in a identifiable manner. 2nd hold indicator 9025B
Displays the number of second special figure reserved storages in a identifiable manner. The number of the first hold indicator 9025A and the second hold indicator 9025B correspond to the upper limit values (for example, "4") of the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number, respectively (for example, 4). It is configured to include (1) LEDs.

On the right side of the main image display device 905MA, a sub image display device 905SU that displays various images including a plurality of types of effect images is provided separately from the main image display device 905MA. The location where the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU are installed is not limited to the vicinity of the center of the game area on the game board 902. For example, the main image display device 905MA is installed near the center of the game area. The sub-image display device 905SU may be installed at any position on the pachinko gaming machine 901, such as outside the gaming area, the upper front surface, the lower front surface, and the side surface of the gaming machine frame 903.

Below the main image display device 905MA, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The ordinary winning ball device 906A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 906B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normally open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 9027 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. It is equipped with a tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) and forms a starting area (second starting area) and a second starting winning opening. The normally variable-sweep wing device 906B keeps the second starting winning opening in a closed state in which the game ball does not pass (enter) by the movable wing piece being in the vertical position. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 9027 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state. ) Make it open.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 9022A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "" 4 ") If it is less than or equal to, the first
The starting condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 9022B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "" 4 ”) If it is less than or equal to, the second starting condition is satisfied.

A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the ordinary winning ball device 906A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball device 907 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9028 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 22, and a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form a big prize opening as. In the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9028 for the large winning opening door is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening, and the game ball cannot pass (enter) the large winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9028 for the big winning door is on, the big winning door opens the big winning door and the game ball passes through (entering) the big winning door. )
It will be easier to do. In this way, the large winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. To do.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the grand prize opening is, for example, the count switch 9023 shown in FIG.
Detected by. Based on the fact that the game balls are detected by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 907, the game ball passes through another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls will be paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, the special variable winning ball device 907
If the big winning opening is opened, the game ball can enter the big winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the large winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 907, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to obtain the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the large winning opening. It becomes a disadvantageous second state.

A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 19, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display device 9020 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like like the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and has a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary design (
Display (variable display) of "normal map" or "ordinary map"). Above the normal symbol display 9020, a normal figure hold indicator 9025C for displaying the number of normal figure hold storage as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 9041 is provided.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 may be provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball, a large number of obstacle nails, and a single or a plurality of general winning openings. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

The game board 902 is provided with an effect movable mechanism 9050 as a movable member capable of performing a display effect according to a lighting mode of a plurality of light emitting bodies arranged in an aligned manner. The production movable mechanism 9050
It has a plurality of (for example, four) movable members. The effect movable mechanism 9050 changes into a retracted state in which a plurality of movable members are separately located at the top and bottom of the screen of the main image display device 905MA, and an advanced state in which the plurality of movable members are located in front of the screen of the main image display device 905MA. be able to. In the following description, the up / down / left / right / front / rear directions will be described with reference to the state of facing the front of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

The effect movable mechanism 9050 shown in FIG. 19 is in the retracted state. In this embodiment, the game area of the game board 902 is formed by a transparent plate (not shown) made of, for example, resin, and the effect movable mechanism 9050 is arranged behind the transparent plate.
The game ball flows down in front of the effect movable mechanism 9050. However, the present invention is not limited to these examples, and at least one of the plurality of movable members of the effect movable mechanism 9050 may be arranged in front of the transparent plate forming the game area.

In FIG. 20, a plurality of movable members provided in the effect movable mechanism 9050 are the main image display devices 9.
It shows the case where it is in the advanced state located in front of 05MA. FIG. 21 shows an operation example of the effect movable mechanism 9050. The effect movable mechanism 9050 is an upper mechanism having two movable members 9051 and 9052 located on the upper side of the screen of the main image display device 905MA in the retracted state, and 2 located on the lower side of the screen of the main image display device 905MA in the retracted state. It can be separated into a lower mechanism including two movable members 9053 and 9054. That is, the effect movable mechanism 9050 is configured to include an upper mechanism and a lower mechanism that can be arranged apart from each other or close to each other. When the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism are separated from each other, the evacuation state is set as the first state. On the other hand, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism are close to each other, the advanced state is set as the second state. The upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are provided with a driving means for changing between a retracted state and an advanced state. The left ends of the movable members 9051 and 9052 are pivotally supported by the decorative member 9057, and the movable members 9051 and 9052 are configured to be rotatable with respect to the decorative member 9057. The decorative member 9057 is a movable member 9051 powered by the operation motor 9060A shown in FIG.
By being output to, it moves up and down with the operation of the movable member 9051.

The movable member 9051 includes a front surface portion and a base body arranged behind the front surface portion, and holds the movable member 9052 between the front surface portion and the base body. The movable member 9052 receives power from the operation motor 9060B shown in FIG. 22 and rotates upward or downward with respect to the movable member 9051. The operation motor 9060B may be attached to the front surface of the base body included in the movable member 9051. The operating motor 9060B provides a driving force for operably driving the movable member 9052. The movable members 9053 and 9054 are connected to a predetermined link mechanism or the like, and the power from the operation motor 9060C shown in FIG. 22 is transmitted via a power transmission unit or the like engaged with the link mechanism to move up and down. While doing so, it can rotate around the left end.

A movable member position sensor 9061 shown in FIG. 22 is provided at a predetermined position of the effect movable mechanism 9050. The movable member position sensor 9061 may be any as long as it can directly or indirectly detect the state of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057.
As an example, the movable member position sensor 9061 may be configured to include first to third position sensors provided corresponding to the operating motors 9060A to 9060C. Each of the first to third position sensors is configured by using a photo interrupter, a rotary encoder, or the like, and from the operating states of the corresponding operating motors 9060A to 9060C, for example, the movable member 905.
Anything that makes it possible to detect the states of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057, such as the positions of the movable members 1 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057. As a specific example, the first position sensor detects the amount of rotation of the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060A, or detects the rotation position of the drive gear connected to the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060A. It outputs a position detection signal that can specify the operating positions of the movable members 9051 and 9052 and the decorative member 9057. The second position sensor detects the amount of rotation of the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060B, or detects the rotation position of the drive gear connected to the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060B, so that the movable member is a movable member with respect to the movable member 9051. A position detection signal that can specify the relative operating position of 9052 and the like is output. The third position sensor is the operation motor 90.
Movable members 9053, 9054 by detecting the amount of rotation of the rotation shaft of 60C or by detecting the rotation position of the drive gear connected to the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060C.
Outputs a position detection signal that can identify the operating position of.

As another example, the movable member position sensor 9061 may be configured to include first to fifth position sensors provided corresponding to the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057, respectively. The first to fourth position sensors are provided corresponding to the movable members 9051 to 9054, and the fifth position sensor is provided corresponding to the decorative member 9057, each of which is a photo interrupter, a linear encoder, and other infrared sensors. Anything may be used as long as it is configured by using. As a result, the first to fifth position sensors are made to correspond to the movable member 9051.
It is sufficient to detect the operating state of ~ 9054 and the decorative member 9057, and output a position detection signal or the like according to the detection result. As described above, the movable member position sensor 9061 may be configured to include a plurality of position sensors provided corresponding to the plurality of movable members.

A plurality of light emitters are aligned and arranged in each of the movable members 9051 and 9052 along a predetermined direction such as a vertical and horizontal direction (vertical and horizontal directions). The plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment with the movable member 9051 constitute the light emitter unit 9071 among the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 shown in FIG. 22. The plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment with the movable member 9052
90 of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 shown in FIG. 22 are configured. As described above, the movable members 9051 and 9052 each include a plurality of light emitters arranged in a matrix.

A plurality of light emitters arranged so as to form the light emitter units 9071 and 9072
Each includes a plurality of types of light emitting elements having different light emitting colors from each other. For example, as each light emitting body, a full-color LED having a light emitting element capable of emitting light in R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is used. As a result, the movable member 9051 and the movable member 9052 emit light from the light emitter unit 9071, such as displaying various colors in a single color over the entire area and displaying a plurality of colors in a rainbow color by distinguishing them within the region. It is possible to perform a display effect according to the lighting mode of a plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged in the body unit 9072. In this way, the illuminant unit 90
The 73 and the illuminant unit 9074 can execute the display effect by changing the color and pattern of the display (emission) using the plurality of illuminants with the passage of time. Movable members 9051, 9
In front of the plurality of illuminants arranged in alignment with the illuminant units 9071 and 9072 included in 052, a partition body formed in a grid pattern is provided so as to partition each of the plurality of illuminants. Further, on the front surface of the compartments of the movable members 9051 and 9052, the movable members 9051 and 9
A front plate is provided to decorate the 052.

The movable members 9053 and 9054, like the movable members 9051 and 9052, each include a plurality of light emitters arranged in a matrix. That is, the movable member 90
In each of 53 and 9054, a plurality of light emitters are aligned and arranged along a predetermined direction such as a vertical and horizontal direction (vertical and horizontal direction). The plurality of illuminants arranged in alignment with the movable member 9053 are the illuminant unit 90 among the illuminant units 9071 to 9074 shown in FIG.
It constitutes 73. The plurality of illuminants arranged in alignment with the movable member 9054 constitute the illuminant unit 9074 among the illuminant units 9071 to 9074 shown in FIG. 22.

A plurality of illuminants arranged so as to form the illuminant units 9073 and 9074
Each includes a plurality of types of light emitting elements having different light emitting colors from each other. For example, as each light emitting body, a full-color LED having a light emitting element capable of emitting light in R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is used. As a result, the movable member 9053 and the movable member 9054 emit light from the light emitter unit 9073, such as displaying various colors in a single color over the entire area and displaying a plurality of colors in a rainbow color by distinguishing them within the region. It is possible to perform a display effect according to the lighting mode of a plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged in the body unit 9074. In this way, the illuminant unit 90
The 73 and the illuminant unit 9074 can execute the display effect by changing the color and pattern of the display (emission) using the plurality of illuminants with the passage of time. Movable members 9053, 9
In front of the plurality of illuminants arranged in alignment with the illuminant units 9073 and 9074 included in 054, a partition body formed in a grid pattern is provided so as to partition each of the plurality of illuminants. Further, on the front surface of the compartments of the movable members 9053 and 9054, the movable members 9053 and 9
A front plate is provided to decorate the 054.

The plurality of light emitters are not limited to those using a full-color LED, and for example, a single color or a plurality of color LEDs may be used, or a light emitter other than the LED may be used. The compartment may be composed of members formed in a three-dimensional grid pattern, or may be composed of, for example, a grid pattern formed on a transparent or translucent plate material by printing or cutting. .. The compartment is not limited to those configured to partition a plurality of illuminants one by one, and may be configured to partition a plurality of illuminants by a predetermined number, or in a predetermined direction (for example, in the lateral direction). And vertically) may be configured to partition. Furthermore, it is not necessary to provide such a compartment.

As shown in FIG. 21 (A), in the retracted state in which the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are separated from each other, the movable members 9051 to 9054 overlap the display screen (display area) of the main image display device 905MA. It doesn't become. At this time, each of the movable members 9051 and 9052 is located above the main image display device 905MA, and the movable member 9052 is located behind the movable member 9051, so that the player cannot see or has difficulty in seeing the movable member 9052. It becomes. Further, each of the movable members 9053 and 9054 is located below the main image display device 905MA, and the movable member 9053 is located behind the movable member 9054, so that the player cannot see or see the movable member 9053. Become. In this way, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the retracted state, the main image display device 905
The MA display screen becomes visible.

As shown in FIG. 21 (B), the movable members 9051 to 9054 overlap the display screen (display area) of the main image display device 905MA in the advanced state in which the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are close to each other. .. Movable member 90 when changing from the retracted state to the advanced state
52 moves downward from the back side of the movable member 9051 with rotation, and the movable member 9053 moves upward with rotation from the back side of the movable member 9054. Further, the movable member 9051 moves downward with the movement of the movable member 9052, and the movable member 9054 moves upward with the movement of the movable member 9053. In this way, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state, the display screen of the main image display device 905MA becomes difficult to see or cannot be seen.

When the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the retracted state, FIG. 21 (A)
), The arrangement directions of the plurality of illuminants arranged in alignment with each of the movable members 9051 to 9054 do not match. On the other hand, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state, as shown in FIG. 21 (B), the arrangement direction of the plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment with each of the movable members 9051 to 9054. Match. In this way, the production movable mechanism 905
When the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of 0 are in the advanced state, the arrangement directions of the plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment with each of the movable members 9051 to 9054 are aligned, so that the movable members 9051 to 90 are aligned.
It is possible to give a sense of unity to the display effects in each of the 54. In particular, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state, a plurality of movable members 9051 to 90
By executing the integrated display effect at 54, the interest of the effect can be improved. Further, since the visibility of the main image display device 905MA to the display screen changes depending on the positions of the plurality of movable members 9051 to 9054, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous and improve the interest of the effect.

At the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 903, there are speakers 908 for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc.
L and 908R are provided, and a top frame LED 909a and a left frame L are further provided around the game area.
The ED909b and the right frame LED909c are provided. Each structure in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, a normal winning ball device 906A, a normal variable winning ball device 906B,
Decorative LEDs may be arranged around the special variable winning ball device 907, the frame member arranged on the peripheral edge of the main image display device 905MA, and the like). At the lower right position of the game machine frame 903, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball as a game medium toward the game area is provided. For example, the hitting ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The ball striking operation handle may be provided with a single-shot launch switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the drive of the launch motor included in the ball striking device.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 903 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) An upper plate (ball hitting plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 903, a lower plate is provided to hold (store) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

The member forming the lower plate includes, for example, a stick controller 90 that can be gripped and tilted by a player at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate).
31A is attached. The stick controller 9031A includes an operation stick held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator hangs when the player holds the operation stick). There is. The trigger button can be operated by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, index finger) while the player holds the operating rod of the stick controller 9031A with an operating hand (for example, left hand). It suffices if it is configured as follows. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button may be built in the operation rod.

A controller sensor unit including a tilting direction sensor unit that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operation stick may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 9031A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit is two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged parallel to the board surface of the game board 902 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 901. A pair of) and two transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pair) arranged perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 902 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player's side. It may be configured to include a photo sensor.

The member forming the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 9031B capable of a player performing a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 9031A) on the upper surface of the upper plate body. It is provided. Push button 9031B
Is configured so that a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor that detects a player's operation action performed on the push button 9031B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 9031B. When an operation by the player is detected in the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B, the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 22 changes the display effect on the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, or produces an effect. Operation in the movable mechanism 9050, audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, top frame LED909a, left frame LED909
b, It may be used in an effect (for example, a notice effect or a reach effect) in which a lighting operation (blinking operation) is performed in a light emitting body such as the right frame LED 909c. Stick controller 9
Instead of 031A or push button 9031B, or stick controller 90
Along with the 31A and the push button 9031B, a sensor or the like for detecting the movement of the player may be provided. For example, a jog dial that can be rotated, a touch panel that can be touched or pressed, may be provided with a configuration that directly detects the movement of the player, or an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or the like. Like the CMOS sensor, it may be provided with a configuration for indirectly (remotely) detecting the movement of the player. The result of photographing a subject such as a player's hand using a predetermined camera may be analyzed (video type motion capture) so that an arbitrary motion can be detected. That is, the movement of an arbitrary object can be mechanically, electrically, or
Any configuration that can be detected electromagnetically may be provided.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, and an audio output board 9013 as shown in FIG. 22. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. Further, the drive control board 9016B and the illuminant control boards 9016C to 9016F are mounted as control boards connected to the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 902 of the pachinko game machine 901.

The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The main board 9011 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a function for setting a random number used in a special drawing game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 9011 is the first
The variable display of the first special figure and the second special figure is controlled by performing lighting control and extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. It also has a function to control the variable display of a predetermined display symbol. For example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, and the like are mounted on the main board 9011 shown in FIG. Switch circuit 90110
Captures detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 90100. The solenoid circuit 90111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the solenoid 9027 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 9028 for the grand prize opening door.

As shown in FIG. 22, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 9021, a start port switch (first start port switch 9022A and a second start port switch 9022B), and a count switch 9023 are transmitted to the main board 9011. The wiring is connected.
The various switches may have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a switch called a sensor.

The effect control board 9012 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 9011, and the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display are displayed based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015. Device 905SU, Luminescent unit 9071-
9074, speaker 908L, 908R, top frame LED909a, left frame LED909b, right frame LED909c, movable member 9051 connected to operating motors 9060A to 9060C
~ 9054, decorative member 9057, and other effect devices, and various circuits for controlling the effect operation by various effect electric components are mounted. That is, the effect control board 9
012 is an image display in the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, lighting in a plurality of light emitters arranged in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, and light emitter units 9071 to Lighting of the top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, and light emitting members constituting the decorative LED different from 9074, driving operation of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C for moving the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057, etc. , It has a function of determining the control content for causing the electric component for the effect to execute a predetermined effect operation. FIG. 22
On the effect control board 9012 shown in the above, the effect control microcomputer 90120 and RO
The M90121, the RAM 90122, and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are mounted.

The effect control board 9012 includes a main image display device 905MA and a sub image display device 905.
Wiring for transmitting a video signal to the SU, wiring for transmitting an audio signal (sound effect signal) to the audio output board 9013, and the like are connected. Further, wirings for transmitting various signals are also connected to the drive control board 9016B, the light emitter control board 9016C, and the light emitter control board 9016D via the effect control relay board 9016A. Drive control board 9016
The information signal transmitted to B may include a drive control signal indicating a command or control data for moving the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 by driving the operation motors 9060A to 9060C. The information signal transmitted to the light emitting body control board 9016C may include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitting bodies with respect to the light emitting body units 9071 to 9074.

Further, the light emitting body control board 9016D is mounted on the left side of the game machine frame 903, and the information signal transmitted to the light emitting body control board 9016D is the left frame LED 90 on the left side of the game machine frame 903.
It suffices to include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitting bodies provided as 9b. Further, the light emitting body control board 9016E is mounted above the game machine frame 903, and the information signal transmitted to the light emitting body control board 9016E is provided as a top frame LED 909a above the game machine frame 903. It suffices to include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitting bodies. Further, the light emitter control board 9016F is a frame 90 for a game machine.
The information signal mounted on the right side of the light emitting body 3 and transmitted to the light emitting body control board 9016F emits light for lighting a plurality of light emitting bodies provided as a right frame LED 909c on the right side of the gaming machine frame 903. It suffices to include a lighting signal indicating data.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22, the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016D is the effect control microcomputer 9 mounted on the effect control board 9012.
Only the effect control relay board 9016A is relayed and transmitted from 0120. Further, the information signal transmitted to the illuminant control board 9016E is transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 by relaying the illuminant control board 9016D in addition to the effect control relay board 9016A. To. Further, the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016F is the effect control microcomputer 90 mounted on the effect control board 9012.
In addition to the effect control relay board 9016A, the light emitter control board 9016D and the light emitter control board 9016E are relayed and transmitted from 120.

Further, from the drive control board 9016B, a position detection signal as an information signal indicating the result of detecting the positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 by the movable member position sensor 9061 is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A. Is transmitted to. Further, as wiring for receiving an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 9031A has been detected, or as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 9031B has been detected. The wiring for receiving the operation detection signal of the above may also be connected to the effect control board 9012.

The audio output board 9013 is a board for audio output provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and the speaker 9 serving as a sound output device according to the audio signal from the effect control board 9012.
Various circuits for outputting audio from 08L and 908R are installed.

The effect control relay board 9016A is installed on a back pack or the like attached to the back surface of the game board 902, and the effect control board 9012 to the drive control board 9016B or the illuminant control board 901.
6C, various signals transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016D are relayed. The back pack is
It is attached to the central part on the back side of the game board 902, and the main image display device 90 is in the center.
It suffices if an opening facing 5MA is formed. The back pack may be provided so as to cover the main board 9011, the audio output board 9013, the drive control board 9016B, the illuminant control board 9016C, and the like from the rear. An effect control board box containing the effect control board 9012 may be attached to the rear surface side of the back pack.

The drive control board 9016B is a control board for controlling the effect movable mechanism provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and the movable members 9051 to 9054 are rotated based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. It is equipped with a driver IC for controlling and controlling the movement of the decorative member 9057. The output signal from the drive control board 9016B is transmitted toward the operating motors 9060A to 9060C. Further, on the drive control board 9016B,
The position detection signal output from the movable member position sensor 9061 is used as a relay board 901 for effect control.
Wiring for transmission to the effect control board 9012 via 6A may be included.
The illuminant control board 9016C is a control board for illuminant output provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is arranged in the illuminant units 9071 to 9074 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. It is equipped with various circuits for driving the light emitters for controlling the lighting of the plurality of light emitters.

The light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F are control boards for light emitter output mounted on the game machine frame 903 and separately provided from the effect control board 9012, and are the effect control boards 9012.
Various circuits for driving a light emitter for controlling lighting of a plurality of light emitters provided as a top frame LED909a, a left frame LED909b, and a right frame LED909c are mounted based on a command or control data from the above. There is.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 is the relay board 9.
It will be relayed by 015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the main image display device 905MA and a sub image display device 905SU, and audio used to control audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R. Control command, top frame LED909a, left frame LED909b, right frame LED909c, decorative L
ED, illuminant control command used to control the lighting operation of a plurality of illuminants constituting the illuminant units 9071 to 9074, movable mechanism control command used to control the operation of the effect movable mechanism 9050, etc. It is included.

The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, 1
RA, which is a chip microcomputer and provides a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing game control programs and fixed data, and a work area for game control.
The M (Random Access Memory) 90102, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes a game control program to perform control operations, and the random number circuit 90104 that updates numerical data indicating random number values independently of the CPU 90103. And I / O (Input / Output p
ort) 90105 and is configured. The random number circuit 90104 is not limited to the one built in the game control microcomputer 90100, and may be externally attached to the game control microcomputer 90100.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 is R.
By executing the program read from the OM 101, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is executed. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, or a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 90103 writes various variable data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores them.
A variable data read operation in which the CPU 90103 reads various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 90 102, a reception operation in which the CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, the CPU 901.
A transmission operation in which 03 outputs various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105 is also performed. The random number circuit 90104 may be any one that counts numerical data indicating a part or all of various random number values used for controlling the progress of the game.

The ROM 90101 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 90101 has a CPU 901.
Data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for 03 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings is stored. Further, the ROM 90101 is configured with table data that constitutes a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals that are various control commands from the main board 9011 and a variation pattern table that stores a plurality of types of variation patterns. The table data to be used is stored.

FIG. 23 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 9012. The effect control board 9012 may include, for example, an effect control microcomputer 90120 or a ROM 90.
121, RAM 90122, effect data memory 90123A to 90123C and the like are mounted. In addition, ROM 90121, RAM 90122, effect data memory 90123A
~ 90123C may be partially or wholly built in the effect control microcomputer 90120, or part or all of the effect control microcomputer 901.
It may be externally attached to 20. The effect control microcomputer 90120 shown in FIG. 23 is configured by using, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and the CPU 90.
It includes 130, a work memory 90131, a host interface 90132, a DRAM interface 90133, and a data memory interface 90134. Further, the effect control microcomputer 90120 is a VDP (Video Display Processor).
) 90140, VRAM (Video RAM) 90141, and display output system interface 9
It includes a 0142, a voice processing circuit 90143, a voice interface 90144, and a general-purpose output controller 90145. The VDP90140 is a GPU (Graphics P).
rocessing Unit), GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or more generally DS
It may be a microprocessor for image processing called P (Digital Signal Processor). VDP90140, VRAM90141, display output system interface 90142
, Voice processing circuit 90143, voice interface 90144, general-purpose output controller 90
Part or all of the 145 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 90120, or part or all of it may be configured as an external circuit of the effect control microcomputer 90120. ..

The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 executes the control process according to the effect control program. The ROM 90121 stores a program for effect control, fixed data, and the like that are read out by the CPU 90130 to execute the control process. R
The AM90122 temporarily stores various effect data read from the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. The effect data temporarily stored in the RAM 90122 is the CPU 9
It is provided to perform various processes by 0130 and VDP90140. ROM901
In addition to the effect control program, various data tables and the like used for controlling the effect operation are stored in the 21. For example, in the ROM 90121, a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination tables, and various effect control patterns are configured. Pattern data etc. are stored. The effect control pattern includes, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, illuminant control data, movable member control data, operation detection control data, etc.) and an end code associated with the effect control process timer determination value. It is composed of process data including. Various data used for controlling the effect operation are stored in the RAM 90122.

The effect data memories 90123A to 90123C store fixed data for executing the effect. Of the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B have storage areas for storing various image data (image element data) indicating the display image in the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU in advance. It suffices if it is provided. The effect data memory 90123C includes a storage area for storing various motor data indicating the drive control contents of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C in advance, and the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. A storage area or the like for storing various light emission data indicating the lighting control contents in advance may be provided. The light emission data indicating the lighting control contents of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 may be generated by using the image data. The effect data memories 90123A to 90123C may be, for example, non-rewritable semiconductor memories, rewritable semiconductor memories such as flash memory such as NAND-ROM, or non-volatile such as magnetic memory and optical memory. It may be configured by using any of the sex recording media.

Top frame LED909a, left frame LED909b, right frame LED909c, illuminant unit 90
The data for creating the lighting data (light emission data) of 71 to 9074 is the effect data memory 90123A, which is separate from the image data of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU. It is stored in advance in any of 90123B. The data for creating the lighting data (light emission data) of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is added to the image data of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU, and the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B. It may be stored in advance in any of. Alternatively, the data for creating the lighting data of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is the effect data memory 90123A to the effect data memory 90123A as image data or light emission data separate from the image data of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU. 90123
VDP90 of the production control microcomputer 90120, which is stored in advance in any of C.
When the 140 executes the drawing process, the display data used for creating the lighting data may be added to the display data of the effect image on the display screen of the sub image display device 905SU.

FIG. 24 shows a setting example of addresses, stored contents, and the like in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. FIG. 24 (A) shows ROM 90121.
An example of setting the storage contents in is shown. The ROM 90121 is assigned consecutive addresses from the address MA00, which is the start address, to the address MA10, which is the final address. FIG. 24 (B1) shows an example of setting the storage contents in the effect data memory 90123A. The production data memory 90123A has a ROM 90 as a start address.
Address MA10 + 1, which is a continuous next address, is assigned to the final address of 121, and continuous addresses up to the address MA20, which is the final address, are assigned. FIG. 24 (B2) shows an example of setting the storage contents in the effect data memory 90123B. The effect data memory 90123B has the effect data memory 90 as a start address.
Address MA20 + 1, which is a continuous next address, is assigned to the final address of 123A, and continuous addresses up to address MA30, which is the final address, are assigned. FIG. 24 (B3) shows an example of setting the storage contents in the effect data memory 90123C. The effect data memory 90123C has the effect data memory 9 as a start address.
The final address of 0123B is given an address MA30 + 1 which is a continuous next address, and a continuous address up to the address MA40 which is a final address is given. In this way, continuous addresses are assigned to the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and the next address of the final address in the ROM 90121 is the start address of the effect data memory 90123A.

In the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, programs and data used for executing the effect by various effect devices are stored in advance as effect data (including binary codes constituting the program module). RO
The M90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are provided with a plurality of storage areas (storage areas) according to the storage contents. For example, the ROM 90121 has a first storage area for storing a program for effect control and various management data, a second storage area for storing audio data, and a reserve other than the first storage area and the second storage area. There is an area. For example, when the entire ROM 90121 has a storage capacity of 8 gigabits, the first storage area may have a storage capacity of 1 gigabit and the second storage area may have a storage capacity of 6 gigabits. The first storage area is 1.5.
It may have a storage capacity of gigabit or 2 gigabit. The effect data memory 90123A is provided with a storage area for storing audio data and a storage area for storing image data. CPU 9 of microcomputer 90120 for production control
The table data of various tables prepared by 0130 for making various judgments, decisions, and settings, the pattern data constituting the effect control pattern, and the like are ROM 90 as management data.
It suffices if it is stored in 121. Audio data used for controlling the sound output by the speakers 908L and 908R is stored in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90123A. The main image display device 90 is used in the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B.
Image data used for controlling the display of the effect image in the 5MA and the sub image display device 905SU is stored, and further, the top frame LED909a, the left frame LED909b, and the right frame LE are stored.
Image data used for lighting control in a light emitting body such as D909c and a plurality of light emitting bodies aligned and arranged in the light emitting body units 9071 to 9074 may be stored.

The ROM 90121 is provided with a storage area for storing audio data, and at least audio data is stored. Therefore, the ROM 90121 is at least a speaker 908.
Provided is a first area for storing voice data as first control data used for voice control for outputting voice from L and 908R. The effect data memory 90123A is provided with a storage area for storing image data. Therefore, the effect data memory 90123A is a display control for displaying an image on the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, or a light emitter such as a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, or a right frame LED 909c, and a light emitting body unit 9071 to 9074. Provided is a second area for storing image data as second control data used for lighting control for lighting a plurality of light emitters arranged in.

In this embodiment, a storage area for storing audio data is provided not only in the ROM 90121 but also in the effect data memory 90123A. The storage area in which the audio data is stored in the ROM 90121 is from the address MA02 shown in FIG. 24 (A) to the ROM 90.
It is assigned up to the address MA10, which is the final address in 121. The storage area in which the audio data is stored in the effect data memory 90123A is shown in FIG. 24 (B1).
As shown in, the address MA10 + which is the start address of the effect data memory 90123A.
It is assigned from 1 to address MA11. In this way, the effect data memory 90123A that provides the second area stores audio data in a continuous specific address range from the next address MA10 + 1 to the address MA11 of the final address MA10 of the ROM 90121 that provides the first area. Area is assigned. In the effect data memory 90123A that provides the second area, voice data as the first control data is stored in the storage area corresponding to the specific address range that is continuous from the final address of the ROM 90121 that provides the first area. That is, the audio data as the first control data is the final of the ROM 90121 not only in the storage area provided in the ROM 90121 providing the first area but also in the storage area provided in the effect data memory 90123A providing the second area. It is also stored in the storage area to which consecutive addresses from the address MA10 + 1, which is the next address of the address MA10, to the address MA11 are assigned.

The effect data memory 90123A originally provides a storage area for storing image data used for display control of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU. On the other hand, because it is necessary to prepare audio data corresponding to various songs, ROM 901
In 21 and the like, the amount of control information data to be stored in order to control the effects of various effect devices may increase, resulting in a shortage of storage capacity. In this case, if a separate new storage device is prepared, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 901 increases. Therefore, by providing the effect data memory 90123A with a data storage area used for control different from the image data, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be reduced. When the audio data storage area is provided, the storage area corresponding to the specific address range continuous from the final address assigned to the audio data storage area in the ROM 90121 is allocated to the effect data memory 90123A. As a result, even if the audio data is stored across both the storage area of the ROM 90121 and the storage area of the effect data memory 90123A, it is read out while updating (incrementing) the address in the same manner as other audio data. By that
The voice data can be read appropriately.

The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 shown in FIG. 23 is RO.
According to the effect control program read from M90121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the CPU 90130 reads the fixed data from the ROM 90121 via the host interface 90132, or the CPU 90130 reads the fixed data from the ROM 90121 via the DRAM interface 90133.
Variable data writing operation, CPU 90, which writes various variable data to 122 and temporarily stores it.
The 130 is a variable data read operation for reading various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 90122 via the DRAM interface 90133, and the CPU 90130 is various signals from the outside of the effect control microcomputer 90120 such as the main board 9011 via the host interface 90132 and the like. Reception operation that accepts the input of the CPU 90130, the microcomputer 9 for effect control via the host interface 90132 and various other circuits.
A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of 0120 is also performed. Also, CPU 9013
0 is the effect data memory 90123A to via the data memory interface 90134.
The 90123C can be accessed and the stored data can be read out.

The VDP 90140 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 has image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function and a moving image decoding function for displaying various images on the screen of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, for example. CPU901
It is an image processor that executes image data processing according to a display control command from 30. VDP
The 90140 can access the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C via the internal bus of the effect control microcomputer 90120 or the data memory interface 90134, and can read out image data and the like.

The VRAM 90141 provides a work area for temporarily storing image data read from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B, and a virtual display in which display data of the effect image created by drawing processing by the VDP 90140 is expanded and stored. Provide an area. If the storage area of the VRAM 90141 is allocated, for example, a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data read from the image data memory 121 is stored, a CG buffer, and the like. Good.
The CG buffer temporarily stores the palette data in which the display color of the character is defined when the drawing process by the VDP 90140 is executed, and temporarily stores the display data of the effect image created by the drawing process. It is used to do things like that. The display data expanded and stored in the VRAM 90141 is, for example, vector data such as points, lines, and polygons (
Pixel data (raster data) created by VDP90140 based on vector data) or the like may be used. The VRAM 90141 may include, for example, the main image display device 9.
It includes an actual display area for storing display data of various images displayed on the screen of 05MA and a virtual display area for storing display data of various images not displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. May be good. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as the display screen of the main image display device 905MA is created in the virtual display area of the VRAM 90141, and the display data of the virtual display area read by the VDP 90140 is displayed and output. It may be output from the system interface 90142 to the side of the main image display device 905MA.

An image display area and an image drawing area may be allocated to the storage area of the VRAM 90141. In the image display area, the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905
Display data for displaying the effect image is stored on the SU screen. In the image drawing area, the display data of each effect image created by the drawing process is stored. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched to each other each time a V blank occurs. The V blank occurs at a cycle of updating the image displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU. Every time the V blank is started, a V blank interrupt signal is output from the VDP 90140 to the CPU 90130, and various other interrupt signals are output from the VDP 90140 to the CPU 90130.

By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V-blank occurs, display data of each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image drawing area in a certain V-blank period (first drawing display period). The drawing process is performed, and in the next V blank period (second drawing display period), this storage area is switched to the image display area. Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output from the display output system interface 90142 to the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU in the second drawing display period, and also. In the storage area to which the image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period, the display data created by the drawing process is stored.

A main frame buffer and a subframe buffer may be allocated to each of the storage areas to which the image display area and the image drawing area are allocated in the VRAM 90141. In the main frame buffer, display data for displaying an effect image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA is stored. In the subframe buffer, display data for displaying the effect image on the screen of the subimage display device 905SU is stored.

The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 is VDP90140.
Access the system registers and attribute registers built into the. Then, various commands and data are stored in the system register and the attribute register according to the process data such as the display control data included in the effect control pattern. In this way, in the effect control microcomputer 90120, the main image display device 90 is operated by the CPU 90130.
The display operation in the 5MA and the sub-image display device 905SU is indirectly controlled.

In the process data, every time a V blank occurs, the effect control microcomputer 9
The settings made by the CPU 90130 of the 0120 to the system register and the attribute register of the VDP 90140 are shown. The system register settings include drawing, data transfer commands, CG data and palette data for data transfer, and attribute settings. Further, the setting content of the attribute register may indicate an attribute as a parameter used in the drawing process of the effect image. In the process data, the attribute is set so that the image is updated every time a V blank occurs. As a result, the image can be updated every time a V blank occurs.

The display output system interface 90142 sets the color signal (gradation control signal), the predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal), and the scanning signal (drive control signal) according to the display data output from the VDP 90140 as the main image display device 905MA. Various images can be displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA by outputting to. Further, the display output system interface 90142 displays a sub-image of a color signal (gradation control signal), a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal), and a scanning signal (drive control signal) according to the display data output from the VDP 90140. By outputting to the device 905SU, various images can be displayed on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU.

The voice processing circuit 90143 is a processing circuit that executes voice signal processing. Speech processing circuit 9
The 0143 accesses the ROM 90121 via the internal bus or the host interface 90132 of the effect control microcomputer 90120, or accesses the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C via the internal bus or the data memory interface 90134 of the effect control microcomputer 90120. By doing so, it is possible to read out audio data. The audio processing circuit 90143 may directly access the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, or may be read from the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C by access by the CPU 90130, for example. By receiving the supply of voice data
It may be accessed indirectly. The voice processing circuit 90143 generates a voice signal (sound effect signal) using the voice data. The voice signal (sound effect signal) generated by the voice processing circuit 90143 is the voice output board 9013 via the voice interface 90144.
Is output toward.

The general-purpose output controller 90145 is, for example, a top frame LED909a or a left frame LED909b.
This is a control circuit for performing operation control in various production devices such as lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the right frame LED 909c and light emitter units 9071 to 9074 and drive control of operation motors 9060A to 9060C. The general-purpose output controller 90145 is an internal bus and data memory interface 9013 of the effect control microcomputer 90120.
By accessing the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C via No. 4, it is possible to read out the motor data and the light emission data. The general-purpose output controller 9
The 0145 may directly access the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, or receive the supply of motor data and light emission data read from the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C by access by the CPU 90130, for example. Therefore, it may be accessed indirectly. General purpose output controller 9014
Reference numeral 5 denotes motor data and light emission data read from the effect data memory 90123C, or display data supplied from the VDP 90140, which is output as serial signal system data (serial data). The serial data output from the general-purpose output controller 90145 may be transmitted to the drive control board 9016B, the illuminant control board 9016C, and the illuminant control board 9016D via the effect control relay board 9016A.

FIG. 25 shows a configuration example of a light emitter control board 9016C for controlling lighting of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. The illuminant control board 9016C is equipped with various circuits for controlling the lighting mode of the illuminant units 9071 to 9074 by the plurality of illuminants. The light emitter control board 9016C shown in FIG. 25 includes a buffer memory 90151, a lighting data generation circuit 90152, and a serial output circuit 90153.
And the illuminant drive unit 90154 are mounted.

The buffer memory 90151 is provided with the effect control board 9 via the effect control relay board 9016A.
The data transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of 012 is temporarily stored. The data temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151 may be any data corresponding to the display data generated by the VDP 90140 or the light emission data read from the effect data memory 90123C. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 is a buffer memory 901.
By reading the stored data of 51 and executing a predetermined conversion process, lighting data constituting lighting control information is generated. The lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 includes drive control data that is drive control information that specifies the drive timing of the light emitter, and a floor that specifies the brightness (gradation) corresponding to each light emission color of the light emitter. It suffices if the gradation data serving as the key control information is included.

The lighting data generation circuit 90152 divides a region in which a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 are arranged in each of the movable members 9051 to 9054 into a plurality of blocks, and the light emitting body is divided into a plurality of blocks. Create lighting data for. In this embodiment, light emitter blocks B01 to B42 are preset as a plurality of blocks. The lighting data generation circuit 90153 generates lighting data corresponding to each of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42.

FIG. 26 shows a setting example in which a region in the movable member 9051 in which a plurality of light emitters are arranged are divided into a plurality of blocks. The regions in which a plurality of light emitters are arranged in the movable member 9051 are the light emitter blocks B01 to B06 as shown in FIG. 26 (A) and FIG. 26 (B).
) Is divided into illuminant blocks B07 to B15. Similar to the movable member 9051, the movable members 9052 to 9054 other than the movable member 9051 are also set to divide the region in which the plurality of light emitters are arranged into a plurality of blocks. As a result, the movable member 905
The entire illuminant units 9071 to 9074 provided in each of 1 to 9054 are divided into illuminant blocks B01 to B42. The number of divisions of the light emitting body block may be arbitrarily set based on the number of movable members constituting the effect movable mechanism 9050, the size of the area in which the plurality of light emitting bodies are arranged, and the like. ..

Each of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 has a square shape such as a rectangle or a square as a basic shape. Therefore, depending on the shape of the movable members 9051 to 9054, etc., in the region where a plurality of light emitters are arranged in each of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074,
It may not fit in the rectangular illuminant block, and there may be a surplus region in which illuminants less than one illuminant block are arranged. Further, in the plurality of illuminant blocks, an empty area in which the illuminant is not arranged may occur in a part of the square shape. Therefore, by including the surplus area in which the illuminants less than one illuminant block are arranged in the empty area in any illuminant block, the processing load of the lighting control for a plurality of illuminants can be reduced.

The serial output circuit 90153 uses a serial signal method to transmit a control signal including lighting control information corresponding to the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 to the light emitter drive unit 90154.
Output to. The control signal corresponding to the lighting data may include a drive control signal corresponding to the drive control data and a gradation data signal corresponding to the gradation data. Serial output circuit 901
Reference numeral 53 denotes a serial output system for outputting a control signal, for example, 21 systems.
It has a plurality of signal output configurations (output circuit and output wiring). Serial output circuit 901
Serial signal wirings corresponding to each of the 21 serial output systems K01 to K21 are connected to 53, and a control signal including lighting control information is output to each wiring in a serial signal system. In this way, the serial output circuit 90153 outputs a control signal including lighting control information to a plurality of serial signal wirings in a serial signal system.

FIG. 27 shows an example of connection setting between the serial output system and the illuminant block. In the connection setting example shown in FIG. 27, the light emitter blocks B01 to K21 are used for each of the serial output systems K01 to K21.
Two of the B42 illuminant blocks are connected so as to be assigned. For example, a light emitter driver for controlling lighting of the light emitter block B01 and the light emitter block B02 is connected to the serial output system K01 via serial signal wiring. A light emitter driver for controlling lighting of the light emitter block B03 and the light emitter block B04 is connected to the serial output system K02 via serial signal wiring. Also for the serial output system K03 or later, a light emitter driver or the like for lighting control of two light emitter blocks is connected to one serial output system. A plurality of light emitter drivers that control lighting of the light emitters included in the light emitter block assigned to the serial output system 1 may be connected by a serial bus method via serial signal wiring. The driver is not limited to the one connected by the serial bus method, and a plurality of light emitter drivers may be connected in series (connected by the daisy chain method).

The illuminant drive unit 90154 shown in FIG. 25 includes a plurality of driver ICs (illuminant drivers) that control lighting of a plurality of illuminants included in the regions divided into the illuminant blocks B01 to B42. .. Each driver IC controls the lighting of a plurality of light emitters based on the lighting control information indicated by the control signal transmitted from the serial output circuit 90153 via the serial signal wiring. Each driver IC is configured to include, for example, a shift register, converts data transmitted by the serial signal system into data of the parallel signal system, and outputs the data to a plurality of signal lines. Each of the plurality of light emitter drivers includes a driver IC on the strobe side, which is a drive control circuit that controls the drive of the light emitter according to the drive control data indicated by the drive control signal.
It is classified into one of the digit-side driver ICs, which is a gradation control circuit that controls the gradation of the light emitting body according to the gradation data indicated by the gradation data signal. Luminescent block B01 ~
In each of the B42s, the driver IC on the strobe side and the driver IC on the digit side are used to dynamically control the lighting of a plurality of light emitters for each light emitter block. In addition, it should be noted
As shown in FIG. 25, in the illuminant control board 9016C, the control signal transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 is the same illuminant control board 90.
It is configured to be transmitted to each illuminant driver by sequentially transmitting between the illuminant drivers on 16C.

As a specific example, FIG. 28 shows a configuration example of a light emitter driver using a driver IC corresponding to the light emitter block B11. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 28, the illuminant block B1
As a plurality of illuminant drivers corresponding to 1, the illuminant driver 90411S on the strobe side
And the illuminant driver 90411DU on the upper side of the digit and the illuminant driver 9 on the lower side of the digit.
0411DD is provided. The serial signal wiring of the serial output system K06 shown in FIG. 27 consists of a strobe-side illuminant driver 90411S, a digit upper illuminant driver 90411DU, and a digit lower illuminant driver 90411DD corresponding to the illuminant block B11 from the serial output circuit 90153. It suffices to be connected in the order of, and then to the illuminant driver provided corresponding to the illuminant block B12.

Light emitter driver 90411S, light emitter driver 90411DU, light emitter driver 904
Address information different from each other is assigned to each of the 11DDs. The serial output circuit 90153 outputs a control signal indicating lighting control information to which address information is added to the serial signal wiring included in the serial output system K06, so that any of the plurality of light emitter drivers corresponding to the light emitter block B11. Crab lighting Control information is transmitted.

The serial signal wiring includes a serial clock wiring to which the serial clock SC is transmitted and a serial clock wiring.
It suffices to include the serial data wiring in which the serial data SD synchronized with the serial clock SC is transmitted. The light emitter driver connected to the serial signal wiring takes in drive control data or gradation data transmitted as serial data SD synchronized with the serial clock SC, and controls lighting of a plurality of light emitters.

The illuminant block B11 includes a half block B11U composed of a plurality of illuminants whose gradation is controlled by the illuminant driver 90411DU on the upper side of the digit, and a plurality of illuminants whose gradation is controlled by the illuminant driver 90411DD on the lower side of the digit. It is composed of a combination with a half block B11D composed of. As described above, each illuminant block may be composed of a combination of half blocks that are modules smaller than the illuminant block. The plurality of illuminant blocks are not limited to those composed of a combination of two half blocks. For example, the plurality of illuminant blocks may include a illuminant block composed of only one half block in addition to the illuminant block composed of a combination of two half blocks. When the illuminant block B11 is composed of only one half block, the illuminant driver 90411S on the strobe side and the illuminant driver 90411DU on the upper side of the digit are provided, while the illuminant driver 9041 on the lower side of the digit is provided.
The configuration may not include 1DD. As described above, each illuminant block may be configured to include one illuminant driver on the strobe side and one or two illuminant drivers on the digit side.

The half block B11U and the half block B11D may be configured so that the number of illuminants is the same. For example, the strobe driver 90411S outputs a strobe signal which is a drive control signal for driving and controlling a plurality of light emitters arranged in 12 rows to which 12 strobe signal lines are connected. Eight digit signal lines are connected to the light emitter driver 90411DU on the upper side of the digit and the light emitter driver 90411DD on the lower side of the digit, respectively, and gradation data for controlling the gradation of a plurality of light emitters arranged in eight lines. Outputs a digit signal that becomes a signal. Therefore, both the half block B11U corresponding to the upper side of the digit and the half block B11D corresponding to the lower side of the digit are formed so as to include a total of 96 light emitters consisting of 12 columns on the strobe side and 8 rows on the digit side. There is. Similarly, the half blocks constituting the illuminant block other than the illuminant block B11 may be formed so as to include a total of 96 illuminants. As described above, each of the half blocks as a module constituting the illuminant block may be configured so that the same number of illuminants can be lit.

The number of illuminants included in one half block is not limited to 96 in total, and may be any number predetermined based on the specifications and design of the illuminant driver. For example, when a plurality of light emitters arranged in 8 columns are driven and controlled with 8 strobe signal lines, a total of 64 light emitters consisting of 8 columns on the strobe side and 8 rows on the digit side are used. It may be formed so as to be included in one half block. Further, the number of illuminants whose lighting can be controlled by one half block and the number of illuminants actually included in one half block do not necessarily have to always match. For example, while the number of illuminants whose lighting can be controlled by one half block is 96, the number of illuminants actually included in one half block depends on the arrangement of illuminants in the illuminant units 9071 to 9074 and the like. It may be less than 96 pieces. As described above, it suffices that the lighting is controlled to control the lighting of a predetermined number or less of the light emitting bodies for each half block as a module smaller than the plurality of blocks in which the area in which the plurality of light emitting bodies are arranged is divided.

The lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data for dynamically lighting controlling a plurality of light emitters for each of the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42. For example, as drive control data that serves as drive control information for designating the drive timing of the light emitter, control data for time-division driving a plurality of light emitters at different timings for each strobe signal line is generated. In addition, PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) corresponding to a plurality of light emitters connected to each digit signal line.
) Generate gradation data that is gradation control information that specifies the brightness (gradation) for each emission color by control. The light emitter driver on the digit side is not limited to the one that controls the gradation of the light emitting body according to the output period of the pulse signal as in the PWM control method. For example, the number of pulse signals to be output within a certain period ( The gradation of the illuminant may be controlled according to the physical amount (pulse amount) of the pulse signal such as the pulse number) and the pulse signal amplitude (drive current value).

The serial output circuit 90153 outputs the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 to the serial signal wiring of the serial output system to which the light emitter block to be controlled by lighting is connected by the serial signal method. The strobe-side illuminant driver provided corresponding to each illuminant block drives and controls a plurality of illuminants connected to the strobe signal line by outputting a strobe signal based on the drive control data. The illuminant driver on the upper side of the digit or the lower side of the digit provided corresponding to each illuminant block outputs a digit signal based on the gradation data to gradation a plurality of illuminants connected to the digit signal line. Control. In this way, in each of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment emit light at a duty ratio corresponding to the digit signal during the light emission drive period when the strobe signal is turned on, and the plurality of light emitter blocks The lighting mode can be changed for each of B01 to B42 by a dynamic lighting method (also referred to as a pulse lighting method, a duty lighting method, or a time division lighting method). In this way, by configuring the illuminant blocks B01 to B42 to perform dynamic lighting control for each of the plurality of illuminant blocks B01 to B42, the illuminant drive unit 90154 can execute lighting control in parallel using a plurality of illuminant drivers. ..

FIG. 29 (1) shows a configuration example of the drive control board 9016B. As shown in FIG. 29 (1), the motor drive driver 90412 is mounted on the drive control board 9016B. A control signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 is input to the motor drive driver 90412 in the form of a serial signal via the effect control relay board 9016A. Then, the motor drive driver 90412 uses the operation motors 9060A, 9060B, 906 based on the drive control information indicated by the input control signal.
Drive control of 0C is performed.

The detection signal from the movable member position sensor 9061 is also input to the drive control board 9016B and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A. The description is omitted in the example shown in FIG. 29 (1).

FIG. 29 (2) shows the top frame LED909a, the left frame LED909b, and the right frame LED909c.
The configuration examples of the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F for controlling the lighting of the above are shown.
As shown in FIG. 29 (2), the light emitting body control board 9016D has a light emitting body driver 90413.
b is mounted. The light emitter driver 90413b is equipped with a relay board 9016A for effect control.
A control signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 is input via the serial signal format. Then, the light emitting body driver 90413b performs lighting control of the left frame LED 909b based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal. In FIG. 29 (2), the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F are connected to each other via wiring members such as a flexible cable and a wire harness, for example.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29 (2), the illuminant driver 9 is attached to the illuminant control board 9016E.
0413a is installed. The light emitter driver 90413a has an effect control board 9012.
The control signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 is the effect control relay board 9
It is input in the serial signal format via 016A and further via the light emitter control board 9016D. Then, the light emitting body driver 90413a controls the lighting of the top frame LED 909a based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29 (2), the illuminant driver 9 is attached to the illuminant control board 9016F.
0413c is installed. The light emitter driver 90413c has an effect control board 9012.
The control signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 is the effect control relay board 9
In addition to passing through 016A, the light emitter control board 9016D and the light emitter control board 9
It is input in serial signal format via 016E. And the illuminant driver 90
The right frame LED 90 of the 413c is based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.
The lighting of 9c is controlled.

As shown in FIG. 29 (2), in the illuminant control boards 9016D to 9016F, the control signals transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 are transmitted to the different illuminant control boards 9016D to 9016F, respectively. Each illuminant driver 904 is sequentially transmitted between the mounted illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c.
It is configured to be transmitted to 13a to 90413c, respectively.

Further, in this embodiment, each LED provided in the game machine frame 903 is comprehensively expressed as a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, and a right frame LED 909c, respectively. Specifically, the game machine A plurality of light emitters as a top frame LED 909a above the frame 903 (
Color LED and single color LED) are provided, and the left frame LED 909b is provided on the left side of the game machine frame 903.
It is assumed that a plurality of light emitting bodies (color LED or single color LED) are provided, and a plurality of light emitting bodies (color LED or single color LED) are provided as a right frame LED 909c on the right side of the game machine frame 903.

Further, in this embodiment, a light emitter driver for controlling lighting of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 (for example, the light emitter driver 904 shown in FIG. 28).
11S, 90411DU, 90411DD. Hereinafter, it is also simply referred to as "light emitter driver 90411". ), Motor drive driver 90412, top frame LED909a, left frame LED909b
And light emitter drivers 90413a to 904 for controlling the lighting of the right frame LED 909c.
13c is realized by using the same type of serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)). FIG. 30 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a serial-parallel conversion circuit used as a illuminant driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, and illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c. Further, FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each input / output terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit shown in FIG. 30.

In the serial-parallel conversion circuit used as the light emitter driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90421, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c, the input serial signal format signal is converted into a 24-channel parallel signal format signal. There are two types, one that outputs and the other that converts the input serial signal format signal into a 12-channel parallel signal format signal and outputs it, but only the number of some circuit elements and terminals is different. In order to have the same configuration and function, the serial-parallel conversion circuit for 24 channels will be described as a representative in the examples shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, and the serial-parallel conversion circuit for 12 channels will be different. Only the part will be explained. In this embodiment, the illuminant driver 90411 is realized by a serial-parallel conversion circuit for 24 channels, and the motor drive driver 90412 and the illuminant driver 90.
413a to 90413c are realized by a serial-parallel conversion circuit for 12 channels.

As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, a clock signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 is input to the serial-parallel conversion circuit via the effect control relay board 9016A and the light emitter control boards 9016D and 9016E. A / I terminal and a DATA / I terminal for inputting data are provided. In addition, a part of the input clock signal and data is branched in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, and can be output through from the serial-parallel conversion circuit as it is, and the CLK / O terminal and data that output the clock signal through can be output. A DATA / O terminal for through output is provided.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29 (2), the light emitting body driver 90413b of the light emitting body control board 16D is a control signal (clock signal and data) input via the effect control relay board 9016A. The light emitter driver 90413a of the light emitter control board 9016E
The clock signal and data from the CLK / O terminal and DATA / O terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit that realizes the light emitter driver 90413b are the serial-parallel conversion circuit that realizes the light emitter driver 90413a. It is configured to be output to. Further, for example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29 (2),
The light emitter driver 90413a of the light emitter control board 9016E is a relay board 901 for effect control.
The control signal (clock signal and data) input via 6A and the illuminant control board 9016D is output to the illuminant driver 90413c of the illuminant control board 9016F. Serial-realizing the illuminant driver 90413a The clock signal and data from the CLK / O terminal and DATA / O terminal of the parallel conversion circuit are the light emitter driver 90, respectively.
It is configured to be output to a serial-parallel conversion circuit that realizes 413c.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the clock signal input from the CLK / I terminal and the other part of the data input from the DATA / I terminal are input to the decoder and 24 channels from the serial signal format. It is decoded into a signal of the parallel signal format of. Then, after being temporarily stored in each register provided in the register block, pulse width modulation (PWM) is performed using an internal clock signal (in this example, a 6 MHz internal clock signal) by an internal oscillation clock circuit, and each of them is subjected to pulse width modulation (PWM). It is output from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. In the case of a 12-channel circuit, the signal is converted into a 12-channel parallel signal format signal and output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q11. In addition, each drive output terminal Q0 to
The output signals from Q23 and each drive output terminal Q0 to Q11 are supplied to a light emitter such as an LED or to an operation motor.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is provided with terminals AD0 to AD4 for decoding address input (AD0 to AD5 in a 12-channel circuit), and terminals AD0 to AD4 are provided. By setting it to H (high) or L (low), respectively, it is possible to set the address for each serial-parallel conversion circuit. DA
The data input from TA / I also includes address information, and the serial-parallel conversion circuit decodes only the data whose address information contained in the input data matches the set address into a parallelless signal format signal. Output from drive output terminals Q0 to Q23.

Since the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit is provided with 5 terminals AD0 to AD4 for decoding address input, a maximum of 32 types of addresses can be set, and a maximum of 32 serial-parallel conversions can be set. It is possible to connect circuits. Also, 1
In the 2-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, 6 terminals AD0 to AD5 are provided for decoding address input, so up to 64 types of addresses can be set, and up to 64 serial-parallel conversion circuits can be set. It is possible to connect.

The S terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting the slew rate of the clock signal output from the CLK / O terminal and the slew rate of the data output from the DATA / O terminal. .. When the S terminal is set to L (low), the clock signal and data slew output is set to the normal slew rate output, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the clock signal and data slew output is set to a low slew rate. Set to output.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the slew rate setting of the through output of the clock signal and the data. As shown in FIG. 32 (1), when the S terminal is set to L (low) and the output is set to a normal slew rate, the rising and falling slopes of the clock signal and data waveforms (voltage change per unit time). Amount) is large to some extent. On the other hand, FIG. 32 (2)
As shown in, when the S terminal is set to H (high) and the output is set to a low slew rate, the slope of the rising and falling edges of the clock signal and data waveforms is compared with the case of setting the normal slew rate. Becomes gradual.

In general, it is better to keep the slew rate low in order to suppress the radio wave radiation from the board.
It is better to set the output to the low slew rate shown in FIG. 32 (2). On the other hand, in order to ensure resistance to noise, it is better that the slope of the rising and falling edges of the waveform is large, and FIG. 32 (Fig. 32)
It is better to set the output of the normal slew rate shown in 1).

The setting of the S terminal is simply the clock signal and DATA output from the CLK / O terminal.
It not only sets the waveform of the through output of the data output from the / O terminal, but also has a function to compensate the output waveform for the clock signal input from the CLK / I terminal and the data input from the DATA / I terminal. .. That is, in general, the effect control microcomputer 90
The clock signal and data output from 120 and the like are output as a square wave at the output stage, but the CLK / I terminal and DATA of the serial-parallel conversion circuit.
When the transmission loss due to wiring until reaching the / I terminal is large, a clock signal or data having a waveform collapsed from the original rectangular wave may be input. In this embodiment,
The serial-parallel conversion circuit does not simply output the input clock signal or data through as it is, but converts the input clock signal or data into the original square wave in the state of the waveform collapsed from the original square wave in this way. It has a function to compensate and output a close waveform. In this case, S
If the output is set to a normal slew rate by setting the terminal, the waveform will be compensated for and output with a large slope of rising and falling, so the output signal in a state closer to the original square wave should be output. It is possible to reduce the influence of external noise. However, if the inclination of the rising edge and the falling edge is large, the amount of voltage change momentarily increases, so that the radio wave radiation to the outside of the substrate may increase. On the other hand, if the output is set to a low slew rate by setting the S terminal, the rising and falling slopes are compensated for a smaller waveform and output, so compared to the normal slew rate output, it is outpatient. Although it is vulnerable to the influence of noise, it is possible to reduce the amount of instantaneous voltage change and suppress the increase in radio wave radiation to the outside of the substrate.

It should be noted that it may be configured so that it is possible to set whether to enable or disable the function itself for compensating the output waveform, and to disable all the functions for compensating the output waveform. Further, the function of compensating the output waveform may be realized outside the serial-parallel conversion circuit by providing an amplifier circuit or the like outside the serial-parallel conversion circuit.

Further, in the above-mentioned normal slew rate output setting, compensation is made so that the rising and falling slopes of the output waveform are larger than the rising and falling slopes of the input waveform. The output setting of the above may be such that the input waveform is output as it is without compensating for the output waveform (that is, the output waveform has a rising edge equivalent to the rising edge of the input waveform as a predetermined mode). In this case, in the low slew rate output setting, it is sufficient to output a waveform whose slope is smaller than the rising edge of the input waveform.

The T terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23.
This is a setting terminal for setting the timeout reset function of the signal output from. When the T terminal is set to L (low), the timeout reset function is set to the disabled state, and the terminal is set to H (
When set to high), the timeout reset function is set to the enabled state.

When the T terminal is set to H (high) and the timeout reset function is set to the enabled state, CL
A clock signal and data are input from the K / I terminal and DATA / I terminal, and after starting signal output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, a timeout elapses after a predetermined period (1 second in this example). The output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are automatically reset (output stopped). Therefore, when the timeout reset function is set to the enabled state, if it is desired to continuously supply signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 to each LED and the operating motor, for example, at least from the effect control microcomputer 90120. It is necessary to repeatedly output the control signal every predetermined period (1 second in this example).

The Q / S terminals provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit are the drive output terminals Q0 to Q.
It is a setting terminal for setting the drive system of the signal output from 23. Q / S terminal L
When set to (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be constant current outputs. Also, if the Q / S terminal is set to H (high), each drive output terminal Q
The output signals from 0 to Q23 are set to be sink outputs.

The Q / I terminals provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit are the drive output terminals Q0 to Q.
It is a setting terminal for setting whether or not to invert the output logic of the signal output from 23 and output it. When the Q / I terminal is set to L (low), the output logic of the output signals from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23 is set to be normally output without being inverted. Further, when the Q / I terminal is set to H (high), the output logic of the output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23 is set to be inverted and output.

The R terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a current reference setting terminal. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the R terminal is connected to each drive output terminal A0 to A23 via a constant current circuit, and an arbitrary resistance value is outside between the R terminal and the ground (GND). By connecting a resistor, the drive current value of all the outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 can be set in a predetermined range (for example, 4 mA to 20 mA).

The VP terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is an electrostatic protection terminal for protection.
The power supply voltage used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the VP terminal. That is, if the power supply voltage used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the VP terminal, an overvoltage equal to or higher than the power supply voltage can be released. When a plurality of types of power supply voltages are used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, the power supply voltage having the higher voltage value may be connected to the VP terminal.

Next, the control data format of the data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit will be described. FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control data format. The basic control data format of the data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit is shown in FIG. 33 (
It is composed of the common format shown in 1) and the basic format shown in FIG. 33 (2).

As shown in FIG. 33 (1), the common formats are 9-bit header (HD), 4-bit device ID (ID), 5-bit decode addresses AD0 to AD4 (see FIGS. 30 and 31), and 1. It is composed of EX data of bits. The EX data is
This is for setting whether the control data format following the common format is the basic format or the extended format described later. In the basic format, EX = 0.
Is set to.

As shown in FIG. 33 (2), the basic format is configured to include 6-bit data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. For example, when transmitting data for LED lighting control, lighting control including LED gradation control is performed by setting 6-bit data in time series for each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23 and transmitting the data. It can be carried out.

Further, as the control data format, an extended format can be used instead of the basic format shown in FIG. 33 (2). Specifically, if EX = 1 is set in the common format shown in FIG. 33 (1), the control data format following the common format becomes the extended format shown in FIG. 33 (3).

As shown in FIG. 33 (3), the extended format is configured to include 1-bit binary data for each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23. In the extended format, since the data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is composed of 1 bit, the control data format of the data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit can be reduced. For example, in the case of driving and controlling the operation motor using a serial-parallel conversion circuit, it is not necessary to perform gradation control or the like unlike the case of controlling the lighting of a light emitting body such as an LED. Therefore, FIG. 33 (3)
It is effective to use the extended format as shown in.

Although the control data format used in the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit has been described in FIG. 33, the control data format used in the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit is, for example, common as shown in FIG. 33 (1). The difference is that the format includes 6-bit decode addresses AD0 to AD5. Also, for example, FIG. 33 (2)
The basic format shown in is different in that it is shorter because it includes 6-bit data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 for 12 channels. Further, for example, the extended format shown in FIG. 33 (3) is different in that it is shorter because it is configured to include 1-bit binary data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 for 12 channels.

Further, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is configured to disperse the output timings of the signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 to spread the spectrum, prevent the generation of radiation noise, and suppress radio wave radiation. .. FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 in the serial-parallel conversion circuit. In this embodiment, the internal oscillation clock circuit built in the serial-parallel conversion circuit outputs a 6 MHz clock signal. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34, the 6 MH is output.
The internal clock signal of z is separated into a 6-phase clock signal of 1 MHz, and the drive output terminal Q0
~ Q23 is divided into 6 groups of 4 channels per group, and the signal output timing is dispersed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34, group 1 is composed of 4 channels of drive output terminals Q0 to Q3, group 2 is composed of 4 channels of drive output terminals Q4 to Q7, and drive output terminals Q8 to Q8 to Group 3 is composed of 4 channels of Q11, group 4 is composed of 4 channels of drive output terminals Q12 to Q15, and drive output terminals Q16 to Q16.
Group 5 is composed of 4 channels of Q19, and group 6 is composed of 4 channels of drive output terminals Q20 to Q23. Then, as shown in FIG. 34, the drive output terminals in the same group (for example, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q3 in the group 1) have the same signal output timing, but the drive output terminals in different groups (for example). For example, group 1
The output timing is distributed between the drive output terminal Q0 of No. 1 and the drive output terminal Q4) of Group 2.

In FIG. 34, the output timing of the signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23 in the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit has been described, but the 12-channel serial-
In the parallel conversion circuit, the 6 MHz internal clock signal is separated into a 1 MHz three-phase clock signal, and the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are grouped into three groups of four channels per group to distribute the signal output timing. I'm letting you.

Next, the serial-parallel conversion circuit described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 34 is described as a light emitter driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, and a light emitter driver 90413a to 904.
An example of connection when used as 13c will be described. FIGS. 35 to 37 are explanatory views for explaining a connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit. Of these, FIG. 35 shows the serial number.
A connection example is shown when the parallel conversion circuit is used as a light emitter driver 90411 for controlling the lighting of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. Further, FIG. 36 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as a motor drive driver 90412 for performing drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C. Further, in FIG. 37, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the top frame LED909a and the left frame LED90.
Light emitter drivers 90413a to 9 for controlling the lighting of 9b and the right frame LED 909c.
A connection example when used as 0413c is shown.

First, using FIG. 35, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is converted into a light emitter unit 9071 to 90.
A connection example when the light emitting body driver 90411 for controlling the lighting of a plurality of light emitting bodies constituting the 74 is used will be described. As shown in FIG. 35, in this embodiment, the light emitter driver 9 for controlling the lighting of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074.
0411 is realized by a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit.

In the example shown in FIG. 35, of the decoding address input terminals AD0 to AD4, AD0 and AD1 are connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V), and AD2 to AD4 are ground (GND).
It is shown that the decode address is set to 00011 (B). Note that FIG. 35 is an example, and since the illuminant units 9071 to 9074 include a plurality of illuminant drivers, it is assumed that a different decoding address is set for each illuminant driver.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 35, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V). That is, by setting the S terminal to H (high), the slew output of the clock signal and data is set to a low slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
The illuminant drivers 90411 for controlling the lighting of a plurality of illuminants constituting the illuminant units 9071 to 9074 are all mounted on the same illuminant control board 9016C, and the transmission of control signals between the illuminant drivers is the same. Since it is performed on the body control board 9016C (transmission across the boards is not performed), it is not necessary to pay much attention to noise immunity. Therefore,
By setting the slew output of the clock signal and data to a low slew rate output, it is rather configured to suppress radio wave radiation from the substrate.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 35, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the enabled state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 35, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are ground (GND).
It is connected to the. That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to L (low), the output signals from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23 are set to be constant current output, and the Q / I terminal is set to L (low). As a result, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to be normally output without being inverted.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 35, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, 10k between the R terminal and the ground (GND)
It is assumed that an external resistor of Ω is connected. In this case, for example, drive output terminals Q0 to
The drive current value of all outputs of Q23 is set to 150 / 10kΩ = 15mA.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 35, a power supply voltage VCL (5V) is connected to the VP terminal and is protected so as to release an overvoltage of 5V or more.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 35, each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23 is a light emitter unit 90.
It is connected to a plurality of light emitters constituting 71 to 9074. In the example shown in FIG. 35,
For convenience, a diagram is shown in which one illuminant is connected to each drive output terminal.
When a color LED is connected as a light emitter, there are three terminals for RGB and one color L.
It may be configured to be connected to the ED, or if a monochromatic LED is used as the light emitting body, one terminal may be configured to be connected to one monochromatic LED. Further, for example, a plurality of monochromatic LEDs may be connected in series to one terminal.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 35, the case where the light emitters are connected to all the terminals of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is shown, but the drive output terminal Q is depending on the number and arrangement of the light emitters.
If it is not necessary to use all the terminals 0 to Q23, the unused terminals may be connected to the ground (GND).

Next, using FIG. 36, the motors 9060A to 90 for operating the serial-parallel conversion circuit are used.
A connection example when used as a motor drive driver 90412 for performing drive control of 60C will be described. As shown in FIG. 36, in this embodiment, the operating motors 9060A to 90
The motor drive driver 90412 for performing the drive control of the 60C is realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit.

In the example shown in FIG. 36, among the terminals AD0 to AD5 for inputting the decoded address, AD0 to 0
It is shown that AD2 is connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V), AD3 to AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decoding address is set to 000111 (B).
Note that FIG. 36 is an example, and another value may be set as the decode address.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 36, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V). That is, by setting the S terminal to H (high), the slew output of the clock signal and data is set to a low slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29 (1), the control signal is not transmitted between the motor drive driver 90412 and the other driver, so that the S terminal is set to ground (GND). It may be connected (set to L (low)) so that the through output of the clock signal and data becomes the output of the normal slew rate.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 36, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the enabled state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 36, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal have a power supply voltage VCS (5).
It is connected to V). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to H (high), the output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23 is set to be a sink output, and the Q / I terminal is set to H (high). Therefore, the output logic of the output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23 is set to be inverted and output.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 36, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, 10k between the R terminal and the ground (GND)
It is assumed that an external resistor of Ω is connected. In this case, for example, drive output terminals Q0 to
The drive current value of all outputs of Q23 is set to 150 / 10kΩ = 15mA.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 36, a power supply voltage VCS (5V) is connected to the VP terminal and is protected so as to release an overvoltage of 5V or more.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 36, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the terminals of the four channels Q0 to Q3 of the group 1 having the same output timing are the first operation motor 9060A.
It is connected to the. Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the terminals of the four channels Q4 to Q7 of the group 2 having the same output timing are connected to the second operation motor 9060B. Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the terminals of the four channels Q8 to Q1 of the group 3 having the same output timing are connected to the third operation motor 9060C.

As described above, in the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, group 1
The output timings of the signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are distributed by grouping into three groups of ~ 3, but the output timings are different between the signals output to the same operating motor. Then, there is a possibility that the driving accuracy of the operating motor cannot be maintained. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, the signals input to the same operating motor are connected to the drive output terminals belonging to the same group, and the driving accuracy of the operating motor is increased. It prevents the situation that it becomes impossible to maintain.

On the contrary, for example, when connecting to the light emitters of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 described with reference to FIG. 35, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LE of FIG. 37, which will be described later.
When connecting to a light emitting body such as when connecting to D909c, the above-mentioned problem of driving accuracy does not occur. Therefore, even if the output timing is different between the signals output to each light emitting body, it is not so much. There is no problem. Therefore, the output signal from the drive output terminal is L.
When connecting to a light emitter such as an ED, it is not necessary to worry about the output timing so much.

Next, using FIG. 37, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is mounted on the top frame LED909a and the left frame LE.
Light emitter driver 90413 for controlling lighting of D909b and right frame LED909c
A connection example when used as a to 90413c will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, in this embodiment, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit. To.

In the example shown in FIG. 37, among the terminals AD0 to AD5 for inputting the decoded address, AD0 to 0
AD3 is connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V) and AD4 and AD5 are ground (GND).
The case where the decoding address is set to 001111 (B) is shown. Note that FIG. 37 is an example, and since there are three illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c, it is assumed that different decoding addresses are set for each illuminant driver 90413a to 90413c.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 37, the S terminal is connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the S terminal to L (low), the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the output of a normal slew rate. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29 (2), the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are different from each other. Since the control signal is transmitted between the light emitter drivers mounted on the ~ 9016F and mounted on different substrates, the influence of noise is large. Therefore, by setting the through output of the clock signal and data to the output of a normal slew rate, the resistance to noise is ensured.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 37, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the enabled state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 37, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are ground (GND).
It is connected to the. That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to L (low), the output signals from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q11 are set to be constant current output, and the Q / I terminal is set to L (low). As a result, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is set to be normally output without being inverted.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 37, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, 10k between the R terminal and the ground (GND)
It is assumed that an external resistor of Ω is connected. In this case, for example, drive output terminals Q0 to
The drive current value of all outputs of Q23 is set to 150 / 10kΩ = 15mA.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 37, a power supply voltage VDC (12V) is connected to the VP terminal. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 37, the serial-parallel conversion circuit has a power supply voltage of 12 V (
Since VLDL) and 5V power supply voltage (VCL, VCS) are used, the 12V power supply voltage VDC with the higher voltage value is connected to the V terminal, and it is protected so as to release an overvoltage of 12V or more. There is.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 37, each drive output terminal Q0 to Q11 has a top frame LED909a.
, Left frame LED 909b, and right frame LED 909c are connected to a plurality of light emitters. In the example shown in FIG. 37, for convenience, one light emitter is connected to each drive output terminal, or three light emitters (for example, a single color LED) that perform the same control are connected in series. Although the figure is shown, when a color LED is connected as a light emitting body, it may be configured so that three terminals for RGB are connected to one color LED.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 37, the case where the light emitters are connected to all the terminals of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is shown, but the drive output terminal Q is depending on the number and arrangement of the light emitters.
If it is not necessary to use all the terminals 0 to Q11, the unused terminals may be connected to the ground (GND).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, in this embodiment, the illuminant driver 90411
The T terminals of the motor drive driver 90412 and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are set to H (high), respectively, and the timeout function is set to the enabled state. In this embodiment, for example, the effect control microcomputer 90120 uses the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 in the effect control process process (see step S9065) described later.
Multiple light emitters, top frame LED909a, left frame LED909b, right frame LED909
A control signal for controlling the lighting of c is output, and a control signal for driving and controlling the operation motors 9060A to 9060C is output. However, since the timeout function is set to the enabled state, control is performed. If the signal is output only once, the output signal from each drive output terminal is automatically reset after a predetermined period (1 second in this example) elapses, and lighting control and drive control cannot be continued. Therefore, in this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 90
The 120 comprises a plurality of light emitter units 9071 to 9074 by repeatedly outputting control signals at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example) in the effect control process process (see step S9065) described later. Light emitter and top frame LED909a,
The lighting control of the left frame LED 909b and the right frame LED 909c is continuously executed, and the drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C is continuously executed.

In this embodiment, the timeout function is set to the enabled state as described above, and the illuminant driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, and the illuminant driver are set every predetermined period (1 second in this example). Since the output from the drive output terminals of 90413a to 90413c is configured to be automatically stopped, for example, the operation motor 9060A
After performing drive control of ~ 9060C, even though control was performed to stop the operation motors 9060A to 9060C, the operation motor 9060 was caused by missing signals or malfunction.
It is possible to prevent a situation in which the driving of the A to 9060C does not stop and the operation motors 9060A to 9060C are seized.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the T terminal is uniformly H (high).
Although the case where the timeout function is set to the enabled state is shown by setting to, the setting of the enabled state and the disabled state of the timeout function may be used properly depending on the application, not limited to such a mode. For example, for the motor drive driver, while the timeout function is set to the enabled state from the viewpoint of preventing seizure of the operation motor, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter unit 9071 to 9074, the top frame LED909a, the left frame LED909b, and the right Unlike the operating motors 9060A to 9060C, the light emitters such as the frame LED 909c do not cause problems such as seizure. Therefore, the T terminal is set to L (low) and the timeout function is set to the disabled state. May be good.

Further, in this embodiment, in order to continuously execute the lighting control and the drive control, the effect control microcomputer 90120 repeatedly outputs the control signal at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example). Although shown, it is not limited to such a control mode. For example, an output circuit (output IC) is provided separately from the effect control microcomputer 90120 (
It may be provided on the effect control board 9012, or may be provided on another board such as the effect control relay board 9016A), and when the effect control microcomputer 90120 outputs the control signal once, the output circuit outputs the control signal. Based on the control signal output once, at least for a predetermined period (
In this example, the control signal may be repeatedly output every 1 second).

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the T terminal has a power supply voltage VCC (
It shows the case where it is connected to 5V), the T terminal is physically set to H (high) on the hardware, and the timeout reset function is set to the enabled state, but it is not limited to such a mode. .. For example, by connecting the T terminal to the register for setting the T terminal and changing the set value of the register by the setting signal from the microcomputer 90120 for effect control, the timeout function is enabled or disabled by software. It may be configured so that it can be set.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the R terminal and the ground (GND).
), An external resistor with a predetermined resistance value (10 kΩ in this example) is connected, and the drive current value of all the outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11 is set to 15 mA. Here, since a serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)) having an internal reference resistor also exists, a serial-parallel conversion circuit having such an internal reference resistor can be used as a light emitter driver or a motor drive driver. Although it is conceivable to use an internal reference resistor, the built-in reference resistor provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit generally has a fixed drive current value (for example, fixed at 20 mA) or a large error (for example, 20 mA fixed). Error ± 30%). Therefore, in this embodiment, an appropriate drive current value (15 mA in this example) is set by connecting an external resistor between the R terminal and the ground (GND) and using an external reference resistor. An error is also recommended (in this example, the error is ± 3).
%).

As a light emitter driver or a motor drive driver, a serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)) that can use both an internal reference resistor and an external reference resistor is used, and is configured to be used properly according to the application. You may. For example, when a plurality of light emitting bodies such as LEDs are densely provided as in the plurality of light emitting bodies constituting the light emitting body units 9071 to 9074 shown in this embodiment, the light emission becomes sparse. Therefore, an external reference resistor may be used to reduce the error. On the other hand, when controlling the lighting of an LED that is used independently, such as for error notification, there is no such obstacle in production and an error may be slightly large. Therefore, an internal reference resistor is configured to be used. May be good.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the electric components (in this example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the top frame LED909a, and the left frame LED909).
b, right frame LED 909c, operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating the movable members 9051 to 9054), and serial communication from the control means (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90120). Depending on the control signal by the method,
Specific signals for driving electrical components (in this example, each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q
Output means for outputting 0 to Q11 (output signal from 0 to Q11) (in this example, the light emitter driver 90411)
, Motor drive driver 90412, illuminant driver 90413a to 90413c). Further, the output means is a first output state (in this example, a normal output state) in which the output state when the input control signal is output to another output means is changed according to a change mode equal to or higher than that of the input control signal. It is possible to set either an output state (slew rate output state) or a second output state (in this example, a low slew rate output state) in which the waveform rises according to a mode of change that is slower than the first output state. (In this example, setting the S terminal to L (low) sets it to a normal slew rate output, and setting the S terminal to H (high) sets it to a low slew rate output). Therefore, the setting can be changed according to the usage environment, and the radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed according to the setting, while the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be improved. Specifically, if the output state is set to a low slew rate, radio wave radiation from the board can be suppressed, and if the output state is set to a normal slew rate, the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be improved. ..

Further, according to this embodiment, other output means are provided in the same substrate as the output means (in this example, as shown in FIG. 25, a plurality of light emitter drivers are provided on the light emitter control board 9016C. Is mounted, and control signals are sequentially transmitted between illuminant drivers on the same illuminant control board 9016C). In this case, the output means is set to the second output state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the S terminal of the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C is H (in this example). It is set to high) and is set to a low slew rate output state). Therefore, when other output means are provided in the same substrate, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed.

Further, according to this embodiment, the substrate and the wiring member provided with the output means (for example,
Other output means are provided on another substrate connected via a flexible cable or a wire harness) (in this example, as shown in FIG. 29 (2), the illuminant driver 90413a to
The 90413c are mounted on different illuminant control boards 9016D to 9016F, and control signals are sequentially transmitted between the illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the different illuminant control boards 9016D to 9016F). And in this case, the output means
It is set to the first output state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 37, the light emitter control board 901.
In the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the 6D to 9016F, the S terminal is set to L (low) and is set to the normal slew rate output state). for that reason,
When another output means is provided on another substrate connected via the wiring member, the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be enhanced.

As described above, in this embodiment, since the circuit board generally has high noise immunity, the suppression of radio radiation is prioritized in the connection relationship in the circuit board, and the output state is set to a low through rate to obtain a gentle signal waveform. On the contrary, the wiring members (for example, flexible cables and wire harnesses) connected between the boards have low noise immunity, so in the extinction relationship between the circuit boards, the noise immunity is prioritized and the output state of the normal through rate is a square wave. The signal waveform is close to. With such a configuration, in this embodiment, it is possible to increase the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction while suppressing the radiation of radio waves to the outside of the game machine.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the S terminal has a power supply voltage VCC (
It is connected to 5V) or ground (GND), and the S terminal is physically set to H (high) on the hardware and set to a low slew rate output state or set to L (low). It shows the case where the output state is set to the normal slew rate, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, by connecting the S terminal to the register for setting the S terminal and changing the set value of the register by the setting signal from the microcomputer 90120 for effect control, the output state of a low slew rate can be obtained by software or the normal output state. It may be configured so that it can be set whether to set the output state of the slew rate.

Further, in this embodiment, control signals are transmitted between output means (in this example, a light emitter driver) mounted on the same board in a low slew rate output state, or output means mounted on different boards. A case is shown in which a substrate (in this example, the illuminant control substrate 9016C to 9016F) in which only one of the control signals is transmitted according to the output state of the normal slew rate between the substrates is provided. I can't be limited. For example, when a plurality of illuminant drivers are mounted on one illuminant control board, control signals are transmitted between the illuminant drivers on the same illuminant control board among those illuminant drivers. And a device that transmits a control signal to a light emitting body driver mounted on another light emitting body control board may be mixed. In this case, for example, even if the illuminant driver is mounted on the same illuminant control board, the one that transmits the control signal between the illuminant drivers is set to a low slew rate output state, and another illuminant is set. Those that output control signals to the illuminant driver mounted on the control board may be configured to be set to the normal slew rate output state.

Further, even when the control signal is transmitted between the illuminant drivers mounted on the same illuminant control board, the output state is not necessarily set to a low slew rate, for example, on the illuminant control board. When the control signal output by one mounted light emitter driver is branched on the substrate, it may be set to the output state of a normal slew rate. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example in which a control signal output by one light emitter driver mounted on the light emitting body control board is branched on the board.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 38, the control signal (clock signal and data through output) output by one light emitter driver 90413d mounted on the light emitter control board 9016G is branched on the board, and one of the branches is branched. The case where the control signal is transmitted to the light emitting body driver 90413e on the same light emitting body control board 9016G and the other branched control signal is transmitted to the light emitting body driver 413f on the same light emitting body control board 9016G is shown. As shown in the first modification, even on the same illuminant control board 9016G, when the control signal is branched and transmitted to the other illuminant drivers 90413e and 90413f, the control signal is attenuated by the branching. It becomes more susceptible to noise. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38, the S terminal is L (low).
It may be set to the normal slew rate output state to increase the noise immunity of the control signal.

In the second modification shown in FIG. 38, the control signal (clock signal and data through output) output by one illuminant driver 90413g mounted on the illuminant control board 9016H is branched on the substrate, and one of the branches is branched. The control signal is transmitted to the illuminant driver 90413h on the same illuminant control board 9016H, and the other branched control signal is an external illuminant control board (not shown).
The case where it is transmitted to the above illuminant driver (not shown) is shown. As shown in the modified example 2, even when the other branched control signal is transmitted to the external substrate, the control signal is attenuated by the branch and is easily affected by noise as in the modified example 1. .. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38, the S terminal may be set to L (low) and set to a normal slew rate output state to enhance the noise immunity of the control signal.

Further, according to this embodiment, the output means is specified by a parallel communication method from a specific signal output unit (in this example, each driver output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) grouped into a plurality of different groups. Signals (in this example, each driver output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q
(Output signal from 11) is output (in this example, in the case of a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, as shown in FIG. 34, each group is divided into 6 groups of 4 channels. In the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, each group is divided into 3 groups of 4 channels.) The output timing of the specific signal from the specific signal output unit differs for each group (in this example, as shown in FIG. 34, the output timing of the output signals from the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11 is a group. It is distributed by each). Therefore, each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23,
It is possible to disperse the output timings of the signals from Q0 to Q11 to spread the spectrum, prevent the generation of radiation noise, and further suppress the radio wave radiation from the substrate.

Further, according to this embodiment, a movable member that performs an operation (in this example, the movable member 9051-
9054). Further, a driving means for operating the movable member (in this example, the operating motor 9).
060A to 9060C) are driven based on the specific signal output from the specific signal output unit of the same group of the output means (in this example, as shown in FIG. 36, with respect to the signal input to the same operation motor. Is connected to the drive output terminals that belong to the same group). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in driving accuracy of the driving means while suppressing radio wave radiation from the substrate.

Further, according to this embodiment, the output means has a stop function (time-out function in this example) for stopping the output of a specific signal after a predetermined period (1 second in this example) has elapsed since the control signal was input. (In this example, the timeout function is set to the enabled state by setting the T terminal to H (high). See FIG. 31). Therefore, it is possible to avoid operation malfunctions due to wiring defects and the like, and it is possible to stably control electrical components.

Further, according to this embodiment, the control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal is provided (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90120 is, for example, the effect control process process (see step S9065). In, at least a predetermined period (1 in this example)
By repeatedly outputting the control signal every second), the illuminant unit 9071 to 907
A plurality of light emitters, a top frame LED909a, a left frame LED909b, and a right frame LED90 constituting 4.
It is controlled so that the lighting control of 9c is continuously executed and the drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C is continuously executed). Therefore, control corresponding to the stop function of the output means can be realized.

Further, according to this embodiment, the output means can be set to enable or disable the stop function (in this example, the timeout function is set to the disabled state by setting the T terminal to L (low). , The timeout function is set to the enabled state by setting the T terminal to H (high). See FIG. 31). Therefore, the setting of the stop function of the output means can be changed according to the application, and the cost can be reduced by standardizing the parts.

Next, the control of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a pachinko game machine 90
The hitting ball operation handle installed at the lower right of the front surface of the housing in No. 1 is operated by the player.
A game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area by a launch motor or the like provided in a predetermined ball launching device based on the rotation operation). When this game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A, the game ball is transferred to FIG. 22.
The first starting condition is satisfied based on the detection by the first starting port switch 9022A shown in 1. After that, for example, the first start condition is satisfied based on the fact that the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state has ended. In this way, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is started.

The second game ball launched toward the game area is formed on the normally variable winning ball device 906B.
When passing (entering) the start winning opening, the game ball moves to the second starting opening switch 902 shown in FIG.
Detected by 2B. The second start condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 9022B. After that, for example, the second start condition is satisfied based on the fact that the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state has ended. In this way, the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is executed. When the normally variable winning ball device 906B is in the normally open state as the second variable state, the game ball is difficult or unable to pass through the second starting winning opening.

In the normal variable winning ball device 906B, based on the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 becomes "normal symbol hit", the opening control and the expansion opening in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip becomes the tilt position Control is performed, and closing control or normal opening control that returns to the vertical position after a predetermined time is performed is performed. Normal variable winning ball device 906 by open control and extended open control
When B is in the expanded open state as the first variable state, the game ball can easily or can pass through the second starting winning opening. The normal symbol start condition for executing the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 is established based on the fact that the game ball passing through the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. After the normal symbol start condition is satisfied, for example, the normal symbol display 9020 is used based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, such as the end of the previous normal symbol game. The figure game is started. In this normal symbol game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the confirmed normal symbol, which is the variable display result of the normal symbol, is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol loss".

When the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is started, or when the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is started, it is special. Whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is to be a "big hit" as a predetermined specific display result is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the fluctuation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern is the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 shown in FIG. Is transmitted from to the effect control board 9012.

After the special figure game is started based on the variable display result and the determination of the fluctuation pattern,
For example, when a predetermined variable display time has elapsed corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, a definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived and displayed. Main image display device 905 corresponding to variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B.
"Left", "Middle", "Right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 90 arranged on the MA screen
In 5C and 905R, a variable display of a decorative symbol (directed symbol) different from the special symbol is performed.
The decorative symbols variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right" are also referred to as "left symbol", "middle symbol", and "right symbol", respectively.

In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B, the definite special that results in the variable display of the special symbol. When the symbol is derived and displayed, the main image display device 905MA derives and displays the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol. As a variable display result of the special symbol, when a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result is "big hit" (
Specific display result), and when a predetermined loss symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result becomes “loss” (non-specific display result). Based on the variable display result being "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as a specific game state which is advantageous for the player. That is, whether or not the variable display game state is controlled corresponds to whether or not the variable display result becomes a "big hit", and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed.

When the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. As an example, "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display area 905L
, 905C, 905R, the same decorative symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines, so that the fixed decorative symbols that are the jackpot combination may be derived and displayed.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening is opened and the special variable winning ball device 907 is in the first state which is advantageous for the player. Then, during a predetermined period (for example, 29.5 seconds) or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the large winning opening and a winning ball is generated.
A round game (also simply referred to as a "round") is performed in which the large winning opening is continuously opened. During the period other than the execution period of such a round game, the large winning opening is closed, and the winning ball is difficult or impossible to generate. When a game ball enters the big winning opening, the winning opening switch 9023 detects the winning ball, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) is detected for each detection.
The game ball is paid out as a prize ball. The round game in the jackpot game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, "16") is reached. Therefore, in the jackpot game state, the player can obtain a large number of prize balls very easily, which is an advantageous game state for the player. The pachinko gaming machine 901 may directly pay out the game balls to be prize balls, or may give points corresponding to the number of game balls to be prize balls.

After the big hit game state ends, the game state becomes the probabilistic state based on the satisfaction of the predetermined probability change control condition, and the probability that the variable display result becomes "big hit" (big hit probability) becomes higher than the normal state. Control may take place. The probability change state is a predetermined number of times (for example, 100).
(Times) variable display is executed, or the jackpot game state is started before the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a predetermined number of times, and it is controlled to continue until a predetermined probability variation end condition is satisfied. .. The probability variation end condition may be satisfied when the next jackpot game state is started, regardless of the number of times the variable display is executed. After the jackpot game state ends, the game state becomes the time saving state, and the time saving control may be performed in which the average variable display time becomes shorter than the normal state. In the time saving state, a predetermined time saving end condition is satisfied, such as the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or the jackpot game state being started before the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until it is done.

In the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the normal variable winning ball device 906B is placed in the first variable state (open state or expanded open state) in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball is easier to pass (enter) through the second starting winning opening than in the normal state. And the second variable state (closed state or normally open state). For example, the normal symbol display 9020 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the variable display result of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game is ".
Control to improve the probability of "hit the normal figure" compared to the normal state, tilt control to control the tilt of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B based on the variable display result being "hit the normal figure" By controlling the time to be longer than in the normal state and increasing the number of tilts as compared to the normal state, the normal variable winning ball device 906B is changed into the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode. Just let me do it. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. As described above, the control for changing the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B into the first variable state and the second variable state in the advantageous changing mode is referred to as "high opening control" (also referred to as "high base control"). By being controlled to such a probabilistic state or a time saving state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit" is shortened, and a "special game state"("advantageousgame") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state It is also called "state"). Even when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the high opening control may not be performed.

In the main image display device 905MA, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) are stopped in a state of being consistent with the jackpot combination for a predetermined time. A big hit occurs before the final result is displayed due to shaking, scaling or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols being swapped. The effect performed in a state where the possibility continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as "reach state") is referred to as "reach effect". In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as "reach mode". Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called "reach variable display". A plurality of types of reach modes are prepared in advance according to the variation pattern of the decorative pattern, and the possibility that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" (big hit expectation) differs depending on the reach mode. That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" can be different depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed. The reach effect may include a normal reach effect and a super reach effect that has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect. Then, if the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA is not a jackpot combination, a “miss” occurs and the variable display state ends.

A variable display of a decorative pattern is performed as an effect of a liquid crystal display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. In addition, the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU
On the screen of, for example, an effect using a character image and an effect of displaying a broadcast image based on a jackpot determination and a determination result of a fluctuation pattern are also executed. Various effects performed during variable display in which special symbols and decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner are also referred to as "effects during variable display". As an example of the effect during variable display, there is a possibility that the variable display state of the decorative symbol will be in the reach state, the possibility that the reach effect of the super reach will be executed, and the variable display due to the effect operation different from the variable display operation of the decorative symbol. A notice effect may be executed to suggest to the player in advance that the result may be a "big hit".

The production operation that serves as a preliminary announcement is the decorative pattern display area 905L of "left", "middle", and "right".
After the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in all of 905C and 905R, before the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state (decorated in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right"). Any symbol may be executed (started) before the temporary stop is displayed. Also,
The notice effect for notifying that the variable display result may be a "big hit" may include one executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state. In this way, the notice effect can be in the big hit game state at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to the derivation of the finalized special symbol or the confirmed decorative symbol which is the variable display result. Anything that can foretell the sex will do. A plurality of advance notice effect patterns are prepared in advance according to the content (effect mode) of the effect operation when the advance notice effect is executed.

When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B and the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is "non-reach"("normal"). It includes a case where the variable display mode is "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") and a case where the variable display mode is "reach loss". When the variable display mode is "non-reach", after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not become the reach state, and a predetermined combination of decorative symbols that does not reach the reach (non-reach). Reach combination) is displayed (derived) as a stop. When the variable display mode is "reach", the reach effect is executed after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and then the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, and finally the jackpot combination is A combination of predetermined decorative symbols (reach loss combination) that does not become is stopped and displayed (derived).

The game balls used as a game medium in the pachinko game machine 901 and the recorded information of the scores given according to the number of the game balls may have valuable value that can be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes according to the quantity, for example. Just do it. Alternatively, the recorded information of these game balls and scores may have valuable value that can be used for another game in the pachinko game machine 901, although it cannot be exchanged for a special prize or a general prize.

Further, the game value that can be given by the pachinko game machine 901 is not limited to paying out the game ball as a prize ball and giving points, for example, controlling to a big hit game state or a special game state such as a probability change state. Controlling, the maximum number of rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the number of first rounds (for example, "15") that is larger than the number of second rounds (for example, "7"), and it can be executed in a time-saving state. The upper limit of the variable display is the first number (for example, "100"), which is larger than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is the second probability (for example, "50").
For example, the first probability (for example, 1/20) is higher than 1/50), and the number of consecutive chans, which is the number of times the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled in the normal state, is the number of consecutive chans (for example, 1/50). It may include a more favorable gaming situation for the player, such as part or all of the number of first consecutive chans (eg, "10") greater than "5").

ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23.
And as part or all of the production data memories 90123A to 90123C, for example NAN
A D-ROM may be used, and the stored contents may be rewritable by a ROM writer which is a data writing device. Such a rewritable memory may include a data area and a redundant area. The data area stores programs and data for executing various processes in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901. The redundant area has an alternative area to be used in place of the defective area in the data area. The CPU 90130 and VDP 90140 execute various processes based on the data stored in the data area and the data stored in the alternative area used in place of the defective area generated in the data area. Redundant areas of such memory
The history information of the memory may be stored. The history information may be any information related to memory recycling. As an example, the history information is the pachinko gaming machine 90 whose memory has been used so far.
At least one of the model identification information such as 1 and the date information may be included. In addition, the history information may include store identification information for each game store whose memory has been used so far. in this way,
By storing the history information in the redundant area of the memory, it is not necessary to attach a barcode for recycling management to the outside of the memory, and the recycling management can be performed accurately based on the history information stored in the memory. Can be done. Since the history information is stored in the redundant area, the history information does not affect the data area normally used, and the identity of the program and data can be ensured.

Alternatively, the rewritable memory may include a control area for storing correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the defective area in the data area and the alternative area in the redundant area. The control area may store the arrangement information indicating the storage position of the history information in the redundant area. Alternatively, a memory control unit that stores correspondence information and reads data based on the correspondence information.
It may be built in a memory, and the memory control unit may store arrangement information indicating a storage position of history information in a redundant area. In this way, by storing the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the defective area in the data area and the alternative area in the redundant area and the arrangement information indicating the storage position of the history information, the data can be read out to the alternative area. Similarly, it is possible to appropriately manage the reading of history information.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described.

When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 9011, the game control microcomputer 90100 is started, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103
After setting interrupt disabled, make the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, RAM10
1 is cleared. In addition, the CT built into the game control microcomputer 90100
Set the register of C (counter / timer circuit). As a result, after that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU
The 90103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, interrupts are permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko game machine 901 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

When the CPU 90103 that executes such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main side error processing, information output processing, game random number update processing, game control process processing, ordinary symbol process processing, command control processing, and other games in the pachinko gaming machine 901. It includes processing to control the progress of.

The switch process is a process of determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 via the switch circuit 90110. The error processing on the main side is a processing in which an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side by software.

In the game control process process included in the game control timer interrupt process, the value of the game process flag provided in the RAM 90102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 901, and the first special symbol display device 904A or Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation of the second special symbol display device 904B and to set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 907 according to a predetermined procedure. Ordinary symbol process processing
Display operation on the normal symbol display 9020 (for example, turning on and off the segment LED)
Is a process that enables variable display of a normal symbol and setting of a tilting motion of a movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B.

The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 9011 to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 9012. As an example, in command control processing,
Among the output ports included in the I / O 90105, for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 9012, corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 90102. After setting the control data in the output port, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off.
Enables transmission of production control commands based on the settings in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control process processing. In the game control process processing shown in FIG. 39, the CPU 90 of the game control microcomputer 90100
First, 103 determines whether or not a start winning prize has occurred (step S9011). As an example, in step S9011, the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9
The input state (on or off) of the start winning signal, which is the detection signal transmitted from 022B, may be checked, and if it is in the on state, it may be determined that the start winning has occurred.

If a start prize is generated in step S9011 (step S9011; Yes)
, A random number at the time of winning is stored (step S9012). As an example, in the process of step S9012, the random number circuit 9 built in (or externally attached) to the game control microcomputer 90100.
Of the 0104, a random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100, a random counter configured by using an internal register provided separately from the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100, and the like. Part or all of the numerical data indicating the game random number (random number value for determining the variable display result, random number value for determining the game state, random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern) updated by at least a part is extracted. The random number value extracted at this time may be stored as hold data associated with the hold number in, for example, a hold random number value storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100.

Following the process of step S9012, various control commands corresponding to the start winning prize are transmitted (step S9013). As an example, in the process of step S9013, the setting for transmitting the start prize designation command for notifying the occurrence of the start prize to the effect control board 9012 may be made. When the start winning is not generated in step S9011 (step S9011; No), or after the process of step S9013 is executed, the value of the game process flag is determined (step S9021). Then, the process according to the determination value is selected and executed from the plurality of processes described in advance in the computer program for game control.

For example, when the value of the game process flag is "0", it is determined whether or not the variable display of the symbol (variable display game) can be started (step S90101). As an example, in the process of step S90101, it is determined whether or not the number of holds of the variable display game is "0" by checking the stored contents of the hold random number value storage unit. At this time, if the number of holds is other than "0", the variable display is started because the variable display is held after the start condition of the variable display is satisfied and the start condition is not yet satisfied. Judge that it is possible.
On the other hand, when the number of holdings is "0", it is determined that the variable display cannot be started. When the variable display cannot be started (step S90101; No), the game control process process is terminated.

When the variable display can be started in step S90101 (step S90101)
Yes), the definite symbol to be derived and displayed as the variable display result is determined (step S901).
02). The variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game is called "special figure display result".
In the process of step S90102, the game random number (random number value for determining the variable display result, the random number value for determining the game state, and the fluctuation) stored at the beginning (the storage area having the smallest hold number) in the hold random number value storage unit. Read the random number value for pattern determination, etc.). The game random number read from the hold random number value storage unit is the RAM 901 in the game control microcomputer 90100.
It may be temporarily stored in a random number buffer for variable display provided in a predetermined area of 02.
Then, using the random value for determining the variable display result and the variable display result determination table, it is determined at a predetermined ratio whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit". Here, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the probabilistic state, the variable display result determination table is determined so that the variable display result is determined as a "big hit" at a higher rate than in the normal state or the time saving state. It suffices if the judgment value in is set.

When the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" in the process of step S90102, the game state after the end of the big hit game state is said to be a probabilistic state by further using the random number value for determining the game state and the game state determination table. Decide whether or not to enter the special game state. Corresponding to these determination results, the definite symbol to be derived and displayed as the variable display result may be determined.

Following the process in step S90102, settings such as internal flags are performed (step S90).
103). As an example, in the process of step S90103, when the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" in the process of step S90102, the game control microcomputer 9
The jackpot flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102 at 0100 is set to the ON state. Further, when it is determined that the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is set to the probabilistic state, the RAM 90 102 in the game control microcomputer 90100
The probability change confirmation flag provided in the predetermined area of the above may be set to the on state so that the probability change state can be identifiable and stored. After that, the value of the game process flag is updated to "1" (step S90104), and then the game control process process is terminated.

When the value of the game process flag is "1", the fluctuation pattern and the like are determined (step S90111). FIG. 40 shows a setting example of a fluctuation pattern used in the pachinko gaming machine 901. Each variation pattern shows the required time (variable display time) from the start of the variable display to the derivation display of the definite symbol that is the variable display result, and the outline of the effect mode can be specified. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol variably displayed on the main image display device 905MA is "non-reach" and the case where it is "reach". Corresponding to each of, and the variable display result is "
A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case of "big hit". The fluctuation pattern is set for each fluctuation time (variable display time) in the variable display of special figure games and decorative symbols.
A plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern,
The variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols can be determined.

In the process of step S90111, the variation pattern to be used is determined at a predetermined ratio by using the variation pattern determination random number value temporarily stored in the variable display random number buffer and the variation pattern determination table. At this time, by making the determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern different depending on whether or not the variable display result is determined as "big hit", there is a possibility that the variable display result becomes "big hit" corresponding to each fluctuation pattern. (Big hit reliability) can be different.

Further, in the process of step S9011, it may be determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to "reach" by determining the fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is determined to be "missing". .. Alternatively, before determining the fluctuation pattern, it may be determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to "reach" by using the reach determination random value and the reach determination table. That is, in the process of step S90111, it suffices that the variation pattern can be determined to any one of a plurality of types based on the variable display result and the determination result of the presence / absence of reach.

Following the process of step S90111, various control commands corresponding to the start of the variable display are transmitted (step S90112). As an example, in the process of step S90112,
As a variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display, a variable display result notification command that notifies the variable display result, and a variation that notifies a variable display mode indicating a variable display mode such as a variable display time of a decorative symbol and a type of reach effect. Settings for sending pattern specification commands and the like may be made. In addition, in response to the decrease in the number of holds due to the start of the variable display, a setting may be made to send a hold number notification command for notifying the number of holds after the decrease.

The variable display time is set in response to the determination of the variation pattern by the process of step S90112. Further, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 90
Settings may be made to start the variable display of the special symbol by any of 4B. As an example, the variable display of the symbol may be started by transmitting a predetermined drive signal to either the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B. Which special symbol display device uses the special symbol to execute the special symbol game depends on which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed. It may be set accordingly. More specifically, a special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A is performed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first start winning opening. On the other hand, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second start winning opening, a special symbol game is played by the second special symbol display device 904B. After that, the value of the game process flag is updated to "2" (step S90113), and then the game control process process is terminated.

When the value of the game process flag is "2", it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (step S90121). Then, when the variable display time has not elapsed (step S90112; No), the variable display control of the special symbol is performed (step S901).
22), the game control process process is terminated. On the other hand, when the variable display time has elapsed (step S90121; Yes), the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and the fixed symbol is derived and displayed (step S90123).

Following the process of step S90123, various control commands corresponding to the end of the variable display are transmitted (step S90124). As an example, in the process of step S90124,
The variable display end command that instructs the end (stop) of the variable display and the variable display result are "big hits"
In the case of, the setting for transmitting the jackpot start designation command (fanfare command) for specifying the start of the jackpot game state may be made.

After executing the process of step S90124, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" (step S90125). Then, when the variable display result is "big hit" (step S90125; Yes), the value of the game process flag is updated to "3" (step S90126), and then the game control process process is terminated. On the other hand, when the variable display result is not "big hit" but "missing" (step S90125; No).
, Clear the game process flag and initialize its value to "0" (step S90)
127), the game control process process is terminated. When the process of step S90127 is executed, it is determined whether or not to end the probability change state or the time saving state, and when it is determined to end based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, these gaming states are terminated. Settings for controlling to the normal state may be made.

When the value of the game process flag is "3", it is determined whether or not to end the big hit game state depending on whether or not the predetermined big hit end condition is satisfied (step S90131).
.. The jackpot end condition may be, for example, that all the rounds executed in the jackpot game state have been completed. When the jackpot game state is not terminated (step S9013)
1; No), the game operation control at the time of a big hit is performed (step 132), and then the game control process process is terminated. On the other hand, when ending the big hit gaming state (step S90113; Yes), a setting for controlling the gaming state after the big hit ending is made (step S90133).

As an example, in the process of step S90133, it is determined whether or not the probability variation confirmation flag is on, and if it is on, RA in the game control microcomputer 90100 is determined.
The probability variation flag provided in the predetermined area of M90102 is set to the ON state. This will
When it is decided that the variable display result is "big hit", if it is decided that the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is the probabilistic state, the game state is probabilistically changed according to this decision result. It can be controlled to the state. Even when controlling to a time saving state, a setting corresponding to this may be made. After that, the game process flag is cleared, the value is initialized to "0" (step S90134), and then the game control process process is terminated.

Next, the operation on the effect control board 9012 will be described. The effect control board 9012 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like. In the effect control microcomputer 90120 in which the power supply for activation is started, the CPU 90130 executes the effect control main process.

In this embodiment, in the effect control main process, the memory inspection process may be executed when a predetermined memory inspection condition is satisfied. Memory inspection process is RO
This is a determination process for determining whether or not the programs and data stored in the M90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are normal. In the memory inspection process, ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 901 are executed by executing the checksum process as the determination process.
The stored contents of 23A to 90123C are inspected, and a checksum as an inspection result can be displayed. Further, the effect control main process includes a process for controlling the effect by various effect devices, such as an effect control process process executed based on the occurrence of a timer interrupt for effect control.

In addition, in the effect control main process, the origin confirmation condition set in advance is satisfied.
The origin position of the movable members 9051 to 9054 may be confirmed. Movable members 9051-90
The origin position of 54 is, for example, a position corresponding to the retracted state as shown in FIG. 21 (A), and the movable members 9051 and 9052 are respectively arranged above the main image display device 905MA, and the movable members 9053, Each of the 9054s may be predetermined as a position to be arranged below the main image display device 905MA. When the origin confirmation condition is satisfied, the initial operation of the movable members 9051 to 9054 is executed, and the movable members 9051 to 9054 are executed.
Control is performed to set each of the above as the origin position. At this time, it is confirmed whether or not the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be stopped at the origin position based on the result of detecting the positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 by the movable member position sensor 9061. Then, if it is not possible to stop at the origin position, an abnormality notification is performed assuming that an origin abnormality has occurred.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process executed by the CPU 90130. In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 41, the CPU 90130 first confirms the connection state of the substrate (step S9051). In step S9051, for example, it is specified whether or not the effect control board 9012 is connected to the main board 9011 and whether or not the effect control board 9012 is connected to the effect control relay board 9016A. In order to confirm the connection with the main board 9011, the CPU 90130 may determine whether or not the initialization command or the power recovery command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received after starting the time counting by the internal timer. Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of timekeeping without receiving the initialization command or the power recovery command, it may be determined that the effect control board 9012 and the main board 9011 are not connected.

42 (A) and 42 (B) show a configuration example for connecting the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A. As shown in FIG. 42 (A), the effect control board 9012
By inserting a connector (plug) provided at one end of the harness HN1, a connector (socket) CN1 for physically and electrically connecting the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A is provided. It is provided. As shown in FIG. 42 (B), the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are formed by inserting a connector (plug) provided at the other end of the harness HN1 into the effect control relay board 9016A. A connector (socket) CN2 for physically and electrically connecting the two is provided. Harness HN1
May be configured by bundling a large number of wiring cables. Production control board 9012
The connector CN01 provided in the above includes terminals TM01 to TM24. The connector CN11 provided on the effect control relay board 9016A includes terminals TN01 to TN24. The terminals TM01 to TM24 included in the connector CN01 and the terminals TN01 to TN24 included in the connector CN11 have corresponding numbers (for example, the terminal TM01 and the terminal TN0) when the harness HN1 is attached to the connector CN01 and the connector CN11.
It suffices if 1) is physically and electrically connected.

FIG. 42 (C) shows the terminal T included in the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012.
An example of setting the input / output contents corresponding to M01 to TM24 is shown. The terminals TM01 to TM24 included in the connector CN01 can provide various voltages such as ground (GND), VSL (rectifying and smoothing AC24V), VDC (DC12V), and VCL (DC5V). Further, the terminals TM01 to TM24 are connected to the drive control board 9016B and the light emitter control board 90.
Terminals TM03 and TM04 for supplying data signals and clock signals for driver ICs mounted on 16C to 9016F, and terminals TM for transmitting and receiving various data by serial signal method.
05 to TM08 and the like are included. Further, the terminal TM of the terminals TM01 to TM24
The signal SM1 used for confirming the connection with the effect control relay board 9016A can be input to the 22. As shown in FIGS. 42 (A) and 42 (B), terminals TM20 and TM of the connector CN01
The voltage of VCL output from 21 is transmitted to the effect control relay board 90 via the harness HN1.
It is supplied to the terminals TN20 and TN21 of the connector CN11 provided on the 16A. The terminals TN20 to TN22 of the connector CN11 may be short-circuited on the substrate of the effect control relay substrate 9016A. Therefore, when the harness HN1 is connected, the connector C
A voltage corresponding to VCL is supplied from the terminal TN22 of the N11 to the terminal TM22 of the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012 via the harness HN1. On the other hand, when the harness HN1 is not connected and is not connected, the voltage is not supplied to the terminal TM22 of the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012.

In step S9051 shown in FIG. 41, in order to confirm the connection state with the effect control relay board 9016A, the CPU 90130 determines the input state of the signal SM1 at the terminal TM22 of the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012. And the signal SM1
If is in a high voltage state corresponding to VCL, the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9
It is determined that the 016A is connected via the harness HN1. On the other hand, if the signal SM1 is in a low voltage state corresponding to the non-supply of voltage, it is determined that the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected. In this way, the connection state between the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A may be confirmed based on the voltage at the terminal TM22 which is the connection confirmation terminal.

Based on the confirmation result of the connection state in step S9051, the relay board 90 for effect control
It is determined whether or not there is a connection with 16A (step S9052). In step S9052, when the signal SM1 at the terminal TM22 is in a high voltage state corresponding to VCL, it is determined that there is a connection with the effect control relay board 9016A, whereas the signal S at the terminal TM22
When M1 is in a low voltage state corresponding to non-supply of voltage, it may be determined that there is no connection with the effect control relay board 9016A. If it is determined in step S9052 that there is no connection (step S9052; No), the relay non-connection flag is set to the on state (step S90).
53). If the relay unconnected flag is prepared in advance in a predetermined area (such as an effect control flag setting unit) of the work memory 90131 built in the effect control microcomputer 90120 or the RAM 90122 externally attached to the effect control microcomputer 90120. Good. If it is determined in step S9052 that there is a connection, the relay unconnected flag is maintained in the off state by not executing the process of step S9053.

Subsequently, based on the confirmation result of the connection state in step S9051, the main board 9011
It is determined whether or not there is a connection with (step S9054). In step S9054, if an initialization command or a power recovery command is received before the predetermined time elapses from the start of timekeeping, it is determined that there is a connection with the main board 9011, whereas the initialization command or the power recovery command is used. When a predetermined time elapses without reception, it may be determined that there is no connection with the main board 9011. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the one that determines the presence / absence of connection according to the presence / absence of command reception, and is mainly based on the voltage at the predetermined terminal that serves as the connection confirmation terminal, as in the connection state with the effect control relay board 9016A. It may be determined whether or not there is a connection with the substrate 9011. If it is determined in step S9054 that there is no connection (step S9054; No)
After executing the memory inspection process (step S9055), the loop process is executed and waits.

In this embodiment, when the power supply is started in a state where the harness that binds the cables as command lines for transmitting various control signals between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 is not connected. , The memory inspection condition is satisfied, and the memory inspection process is executed in step S9055. On the other hand, when the power supply is started with the harness connected between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012, the memory inspection condition is not satisfied and the memory inspection process in step S9055 is not executed. In this way, the main board 901
The memory inspection condition may be satisfied by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in a state where the cable (harness) serving as a command line attached between 1 and the effect control board 9012 is disconnected.

The memory inspection condition is not limited to the one that is satisfied when the power is turned on with the command line removed. For example, the memory inspection condition is satisfied when the power is turned on while the push button 9031B is pressed. There may be. Alternatively, for example, the memory inspection condition may be satisfied by turning on the power with the openable and closable game machine frame 903 open. In addition, the memory inspection condition may be satisfied by detecting an arbitrary predetermined state.

In the memory inspection process of step S9055, the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90
A checksum calculation or the like is performed using the stored data of 123A to 90123C, and the calculation result or the like may be displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. When the memory inspection process is executed, the power switch of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is turned off once, and then the power switch is turned on again with the cable (harness) as the command line connected. The control may be in a state where it can be executed. Alternatively, by connecting a cable (harness) as a command line and pressing the reset switch, it may be possible to control the effect without turning on the power again. Alternatively, the power switch of the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be turned off once, and then the power is turned on while the push button 9031B is not pressed, so that the effect control can be executed. In addition, when a predetermined effect control condition is satisfied, the process may proceed to step S9056 so that the effect control can be executed.

If it is determined in step S9054 that there is a connection (step S9054; Yes.
), The initial setting process (step S9056) is executed. In the initial setting process of step S9056, for example, the storage area in the RAM 90122 is cleared, various initial values are set, and the CTC (counter and timer circuit) register setting for generating a timer interrupt for effect control is performed. This initial setting process may include an effect data transfer process. The effect data transfer process is a predetermined data (binary code constituting the program module, etc.) among the programs and data stored in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C and used to execute the effect by various effect devices. (Including) may be a process for transferring to RAM 90122, VRAM 90141, or the like. Further, in the initial setting process, along with the transfer of the effect data by the effect data transfer process, the execution control of the initial operation by the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 may be performed. The initial operation performed at this time is, for example, an operation of changing (moving) the movable members 9051 to 9054 from the retracted state to the advanced state, stopping the movable members in the advanced state until a predetermined time elapses, and then returning to the retracted state. And so on.

After executing the initial setting process in step S9056, it is determined whether or not the relay unconnected flag is on (step S9057). If the relay not connected flag is off (
Step S9057; No), the origin position of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the like is confirmed corresponding to the state in which the effect control relay board 9016A is connected (step S90).
58). In this case, it is determined whether or not there is an origin abnormality (step S9059), and if there is an origin abnormality (step S9059; Yes), the origin abnormality is notified (step S9060), and the process returns to step S9058. After notifying the origin abnormality in step S9060, the process may proceed to step S9061.

In step S9058, for example, in order to confirm the origin position of the movable members 9051 to 9054, the movable member position sensor 9061 is used as a position detection signal of the movable members 9051 to 9054.
Acquires the detection signal by. The detection signal by the movable member position sensor 9061 is the movable member 9
The result of detecting the position of 051 to 9054 is shown. In the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 42 (A), the signal input to the terminal TM07 for serial reception may include the detection signal by the movable member position sensor 9061. C
By confirming the detection signal by the movable member position sensor 9061 acquired by the general-purpose output controller 90145, the PU 90130 determines whether or not the movable members 9051 to 9054 are at the origin position based on the position detection signals of the movable members 9051 to 9054. I just need to be able to confirm. The notification of the origin abnormality by step S9060 is, for example, the main image display device 905M.
Image display on the screen of A or sub image display device 905SU, speakers 908L, 908
Audio output from R, lighting of a notification lamp provided separately from the top frame LED909a, left frame LED909b, right frame LED909c or top frame LED909a, left frame LED909b, right frame LED909c, and notification operation using other production devices. , Or a combination of some or all of these, as long as it is feasible. Further, the signal output from the specific terminal provided on the effect control board 9012 may be in a different output state depending on the presence or absence of the origin abnormality. As described above, the abnormality notification of the movable member may be feasible by controlling an arbitrary output.

When it is determined in step S9057 that the relay non-connection flag is on, the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012 is connected to the connector CN11 provided on the harness HN1 and the effect control relay board 9016A. There is no effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A is not connected. In this case, the connector CN
There is no input of the detection signal by the movable member position sensor 9061 at the terminal TM07 of 01. Therefore, even if the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 are confirmed, it is determined that there is an origin abnormality, and the abnormality notification is executed. In particular, in the manufacturing stage and the development stage, for the purpose of confirming the operation of the effect control microcomputer 90120, for example, the power is turned on when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected. is there. In order to prevent the frequent occurrence of abnormality notifications in the manufacturing stage and the development stage and improve work efficiency, steps S9058 to S9060 are performed in response to the determination in step S9057 that the relay unconnected flag is on. Do not run. As a result, when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected, the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 are not confirmed, and the abnormality notification due to the occurrence of the origin abnormality is not executed. ..

When it is determined in step S9057 that the relay non-connection flag is on (step S9057; Yes), or when it is determined in step S9059 that there is no origin abnormality (step S9057; Yes)
Step S9059; No), the effect random number update process (step S9061) is executed in the effect control main process, and the numerical data indicating the random number value to be the effect random number is updated by software. The effect random numbers are counted as various random number values used for effect control.
It should be noted that the random number for effect that is updated by the hardware using the random number circuit built in (or externally attached) to the effect control microcomputer 90120 does not have to be updated in the effect random number update process. Alternatively, the production random number may be updated by software using numerical data indicating a random number value updated by hardware.

After executing the effect random number update process in step S9061, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S9062). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state when a timer interrupt for effect control occurs. When it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is on (step S9062; Yes), after the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S9063), the command analysis process (step S9064) is performed.
) And the effect control process process (step S9065) are sequentially executed, and then the process returns to the process of step S9061. Command analysis processing in step S9064 and step S9065
The effect control process process of is included in the timer interrupt process for effect control. If it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is off (step S9062; No), step S90
The process returns to the process of step S9061 without executing the processes of 63 to S9065.

FIG. 43 shows an execution example of abnormality notification in step S9060 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the execution example shown in FIG. 43, the occurrence of an origin abnormality is notified by displaying an image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. At this time, which of the upper mechanism (upper accessory) and the lower mechanism (lower accessory) of the effect movable mechanism 9050 is abnormal based on the position detection signal indicating the detection result by the movable member position sensor 9061? An identifiable error message may be displayed. In this way, the movable member is in a notification mode in which the clerk of the amusement park or the like can recognize which type of accessory is abnormal among the plurality of types of accessory configured by using the plurality of movable members. Abnormality notification may be performed.

The display screen of the main image display device 905MA is difficult or invisible when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state. Therefore, when the abnormality notification of the movable member is performed by displaying the image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, the clerk of the amusement park or the like may have difficulty or cannot recognize the occurrence of the abnormality. Therefore, along with the image display by the main image display device 905MA or the like, or instead of the image display, an abnormality notification of the movable member is performed by using a notification unit that can be visually recognized regardless of the state of the upper mechanism or the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050. May be done. As such a notification unit, for example, it is provided at the upper position, the left portion position, and the right portion position of the game machine frame 903, and is included in the top frame LED909a, the left frame LED909b, and the right frame LED909c, or the top frame LED909a or the left. A plurality of light emitting members for notification provided separately from the frame LED 909b and the right frame LED 909c may be used. These light emitting members for notification include, for example, LEDs.
It may be configured using. A notification mode that allows a game hall clerk or the like to recognize which type of accessory has an abnormality depending on the combination of lighting modes by a plurality of notification light emitting members.
An abnormality notification of the movable member may be performed. As an example, when the notification unit includes the first notification light emitting member and the second notification light emitting member, in step S9060 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 41, an abnormality occurs in the upper mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050. For example, the lighting control of the notification unit may be performed so that the first notification light emitting member lights up, while the second notification light emitting member lights up when an abnormality occurs in the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050. in this way,
By notifying the abnormality of the movable member using a notification unit that can be recognized regardless of the state of the movable member, even if there is a configuration that is difficult or unrecognizable depending on the state of the movable member.
It is possible to identifiablely notify that an abnormality has occurred in a movable member and which movable member has an abnormality.

The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 can execute interrupt processing for command reception in addition to the timer interrupt process for effect control, and can execute the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015. , Host interface 90
It suffices if it can be obtained from 132. The effect control command acquired at this time may be temporarily stored in a reception command buffer provided in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122, for example. In the command analysis process of step S9064, it is determined whether or not the effect control command has been received, and if it is received, the setting and control corresponding to the received command are performed. In the effect control process process of step S9065, for example, an image display for effect on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and light emitter units 9071 to 907.
Lighting in a plurality of light emitters arranged in each of 4 and light emitter units 9071 to 9
Various production devices such as lighting of various light emitting members such as top frame LED909a, left frame LED909b, right frame LED909c, and decorative LED, which are different from 074, and drive operation of operation motors 9060A to 9060C for moving movable members 9051 to 9054. With respect to the operation control content using the above, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 9011.

FIG. 44 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9055 of FIG. 41 as the memory inspection process. In the memory inspection process, as checksum operations using the stored data of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, a first checksum operation using the stored data in a plurality of storage areas provided in the ROM 90121 and the stored data in the ROM 90121 The second checksum calculation using all of the above, the third checksum calculation using the stored data in the plurality of storage areas provided in the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and the effect data memories 90123A to 9
Of the fourth checksum operation using all of the stored data in 0123C, some or all of the operations may be executed. In this embodiment, after the second checksum operation is executed following the first checksum operation, the operation using all of the stored data in each of the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is executed as the fourth checksum operation. Then, each calculation result and the like are displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA.

In the memory inspection process shown in FIG. 44A, the CPU 90130 first sets the memory inspection setting table (step S90201). The memory check setting table is a table for setting the checksum calculation start address and the calculation end address by the checksum calculation. The table data that constitutes the memory inspection setting table is, for example, ROM.
It may be stored in advance in a predetermined area (for example, a first storage area) of 90121.

FIG. 44B shows a configuration example of the memory inspection setting table. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 44 (B), the checksum calculation start address and the calculation end address are specified corresponding to each of the display times "0" to "5". The number of impressions is the main image display device 905M.
This is the number of times the checksum is displayed on the screen of A, and after "0" is set as the initial value,
1 may be added each time the calculation result of the checksum calculation is displayed.

Following the setting in step S90201 shown in FIG. 44 (A), the number of impressions is set to "0" (step S90202). For example, in step S90202, it is sufficient that the count value of the display count can be set to "0" by clearing (initializing) the display count counter prepared in advance. The display count counter may be configured by using the built-in register of the CPU 90130, or may be configured by using a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122 (such as an effect control counter setting unit).

After that, the parameter corresponding to the number of impressions is set (step S90203).
For example, in step S90203, the clear data is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. In addition, the checksum calculation end address is set so that it can be compared with the address indicated by the pointer. These parameters may be set in a plurality of registers built in the CPU 90130, or may be set in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122.

The checksum is calculated using the parameters set in step S90203 (step S90204). For example, in step S90204, the contents of the checksum data area and the ROM 90121 indicated by the pointer and the effect data memories 90123A to 9012
The exclusive OR with the stored data at the 3C address is calculated. The calculation result is stored as new stored data in the checksum data area, and it is determined whether or not the address indicated by the value of the pointer has reached the calculation end address. If the calculation end address has not been reached, the pointer value is added by 1, and the process returns to the process of calculating the exclusive OR. When the calculation end address is reached, a checksum using the stored data from the calculation start address to the calculation end address can be obtained by inverting the value of each bit that is the content of the checksum data area. ..

With the checksum calculation in step S90204, it is determined whether or not the relay non-connection flag is on (step S90205), and if the relay non-connection flag is on (step S90205; Yes), the calculation according to the number of impressions. Update and display the contents (step S902)
06). Therefore, when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected, the checksum calculation execution result and the like are controlled so as to be displayable. On the other hand, if the relay not connected flag is off (step S90205).
; No), the process of step S90206 is not executed. As a result, when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected, the checksum calculation execution result and the like are controlled so as not to be displayed. The determination result by the determination process for determining whether or not the effect data stored in the ROM 90121 or the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is normal by updating and displaying the calculation content in step S90206 is referred to as the main image display device 905MA. It can be displayed on the display device.

After that, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculation is completed (step S90207), and if it is not completed (step S90207; No), the process returns to step S90204 to continue the checksum calculation. When the calculation is completed in step S90207 (step S90207; Yes), after adding 1 to the number of impressions (step S90208), it is determined whether or not the number of impressions has reached the end determination value (step S90209). ). By setting, for example, "6" in advance as the end determination value, it is possible to display six checksum calculation results corresponding to the settings of the memory inspection setting table as shown in FIG. 44 (B). it can. If the end determination value has not been reached (step S90209; No), the process returns to step S90203, and if the end determination value is reached, the memory inspection process is terminated.

FIG. 45 shows a display example of the calculation result on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. In this display example, as the checksum calculation result corresponding to the setting of the memory inspection setting table as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the "program ROM" corresponding to ROM 90121 is used.
The production data memory 90 displays the three types of calculation results (A) to (C).
About the "data ROM" corresponding to 123A to 90123C, three kinds of calculation results (A) to (C) are displayed. Further, in the display example of FIG. 45, the progress status (completion rate) of the checksum calculation and the presence or absence of an abnormality based on the calculation result are displayed so as to be confirmed. (A) of the "program ROM" shown in FIG. 45 corresponds to the calculation start address MA00 and the calculation end address MA01 set when the number of impressions is "0" in the memory inspection setting table shown in FIG. 44 (B). Then, it is shown that the checksum is calculated by using the storage data of the first storage area in which the program for effect control and various management data are stored in the ROM 90121. (B) of the "program ROM" shown in FIG. 45 is the calculation start address MA0 set when the number of impressions is "1" in the memory inspection setting table shown in FIG. 44 (B).
Corresponding to 2 and the calculation end address MA10, it is shown that the checksum is calculated using the storage data of the second storage area in which the voice data is stored in the ROM 90121. (C) of the "program ROM" shown in FIG. 45 corresponds to the calculation start address MA00 and the calculation end address MA10 set when the number of impressions is "2" in the memory inspection setting table shown in FIG. 44 (B). Therefore, it is shown that the checksum is calculated by using all the stored data in the ROM 90121. (A) of the "data ROM" shown in FIG.
) Corresponds to the calculation start address MA10 + 1 and the calculation end address MA20 set when the number of impressions is “3” in the memory inspection setting table shown in FIG. 44 (B), and corresponds to the storage data in the effect data memory 90123A. It shows that the checksum is calculated using all of them. (B) of the “data ROM” shown in FIG. 45 is the calculation start address MA20 + 1 set when the number of impressions is “4” in the memory inspection setting table shown in FIG. 44 (B).
It is shown that the checksum is calculated by using all the stored data in the effect data memory 90123B corresponding to the calculation end address MA30. "
(C) of the "data ROM" is the memory inspection setting table shown in FIG. 44 (B), and the number of impressions is ".
It is shown that the checksum is calculated by using all the stored data in the effect data memory 90123C corresponding to the calculation start address MA30 + 1 and the calculation end address MA40 set in the case of "5".

The checksum calculation results are ROM 90121 and production data memory 90123A to 90.
It will be different depending on the content of the stored data in 123C. For example, ROM 90121
And production data memories 90123A to 90123C are EEPROM or NAND-RO
In the case of a non-volatile semiconductor memory such as M that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, a version of the effect control program or various data stored in the ROM 90121 or the effect data memory 90123A to 90123C. The calculation results of different checksums can be obtained according to the above. By executing the memory inspection process as shown in FIG. 44A and displaying the checksum calculation result on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, the ROM 90121 is displayed in the manufacturing stage and the development stage of the pachinko gaming machine 901. And production data memory 901
It is possible to easily confirm the version of the effect control program and various data stored in 23A to 90123C. As a result, the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 9
Version control of the stored data in 0123A to 90123C becomes easy, and it is possible to surely prevent inconsistency between the program for effect control and the version of audio data, image data, etc., for example. In addition to the checksum calculation result, version information indicating the version of the effect control program and various data may be displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. Version information includes ROM 90121 and production data memory 90.
It may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of 123A to 90123C. By displaying the version information together with the checksum calculation result, it is easier to check the version of the program for effect control and various data, and by reading the checksum corresponding to the version, is there an error in the stored data? It can be easily confirmed whether or not it is.

Note that the stored data used for checksum calculation and the number of checksum impressions are RO.
It may be arbitrarily changed according to the setting of the memory inspection for the M90121, the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and the like. As an example, in the memory inspection setting table shown in FIG. 44 (B), the checksum calculation corresponding to the calculation start address MA00 and the calculation end address MA10 set when the number of impressions is "2" is not executed. By setting it, the calculation result may be displayed for a smaller number of checksums. Alternatively, the calculation result may be displayed for more checksums by adding the setting of the calculation start address and the calculation end address corresponding to the number of display times of "6" or more.

The memory inspection process shown in FIG. 44A is step S of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 41.
When it is determined in 9054 that there is no connection with the main board 9011, it is executed in step S9055. Further, when it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. 44A that the relay unconnected flag is on, the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A
Is not connected. Therefore, when both the effect control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, step S902
The update display by 06 becomes possible, and the judgment result of the program and the data based on the checksum calculation result can be displayed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S9054 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 41 that there is a connection with the main board 9011, step S90
The memory check process of 55 is not executed. Further, even when the memory inspection process is executed in step S9055, if it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. 44 (A) that the relay unconnected flag is off, the update display in step S90206 is performed. I can't.
As a result, if either one of the effect control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the program or data determination result based on the checksum calculation result is not displayed. To control.

Instead of the update display of the calculation content in step S90206, or together with the update display of the calculation content, arbitrary notification based on the checksum calculation result may be performed. For example, instead of the image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, or together with this image display, the image display on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU, the speaker 908.
Audio output from L, 908R, top frame LED909a, left frame LED909b, right frame LED9
ROM 90121 or production data by lighting of a notification lamp provided separately from 09c or the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c, notification operation using other production devices, a combination of some or all of them, etc. Memory 90123A-90
Notification that can specify the determination result of the determination process for determining whether or not the effect data stored in the 123C is normal may be executed. Further, the signal output from the specific terminal provided on the effect control board 9012 may be in a different output state depending on the checksum calculation result or the like.
As described above, the determination result of whether or not the effect data is normal may be any one that can be notified by controlling an arbitrary output.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process executed in step S9065 of FIG. 41. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 46, the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 determines whether or not it is the BGM change timing (step S90151). For example, the CPU 90130 is a main board 9011.
When the predetermined BGM change condition is satisfied based on the effect control command transmitted from the above, it may be determined that the BGM change timing is reached. As an example, the BGM change condition may be set so as to be satisfied when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is changed to any of a normal state, a probability change state, and a time saving state.

When it is determined in step S90151 that it is the BGM change timing (step S90151; Yes), the start address and end address of the audio data corresponding to the music to be played as BGM are specified (step S90152). For example, in the predetermined area of the ROM 90121, the ROM 90121 or the effect data memory 90123 is used for audio data corresponding to the music to be played as BGM for each gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901.
It suffices if the BGM setting table including the data indicating the start address and the end address in A can be specified is stored in advance. The CPU 90130 may specify the start address and end address of the audio data by referring to the BGM setting table according to the game state specified based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011.

Following the process of step S90152, loop reproduction start control for starting loop reproduction for repeatedly reproducing the music to be BGM is performed (step S90153). For example CP
The U90130 notifies the voice processing circuit 90143 of a command indicating a loop reproduction instruction together with the start address and the end address of the voice data identified in step S90152. In the audio processing circuit 90143, the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90
It suffices if the 123A can be accessed and voice data can be read from the section between the start address and the end address indicated in the command from the CPU 90130. Then, according to the designation of performing loop reproduction, the music corresponding to the audio data may be sequentially reproduced from the beginning, and when the end of the music is reproduced, it may return to the beginning and repeat the reproduction of the music.

By the loop reproduction start control in step S90153, for example, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the normal state, the music as the normal BGM can be repeatedly reproduced. Further, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the probabilistic state, the music as the probabilistic BGM can be repeatedly played. When the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the time saving state, the music as BGM can be repeatedly played during the time saving.

When it is determined in step S90151 that it is not the BGM change timing (step S90151; No), or after the loop reproduction start control in step S90153 is executed, the process corresponding to the value of the effect process flag is executed. At this time, CPU 90130
Determines the value of the effect process flag stored in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or RAM 90122, and from a plurality of processes described in advance in the effect control program,
Select and execute the process according to the judgment value. The process executed according to the determination value of the effect process flag includes the processes of steps S90170 to S90176.

The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process is a variable display of a decorative symbol on the screen of the main image display device 905MA based on whether or not a first fluctuation start command or a second fluctuation start command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received. Includes processing to determine whether or not to start. The first fluctuation start command is the first special symbol display device 9
This is an effect control command for notifying that the special figure game using the first special figure by 04A is started. The second variation start command is an effect control command for notifying that the special figure game using the second special figure is started by the second special symbol display device 904B. When either the first fluctuation start command or the second fluctuation start command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1".

The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process is performed by the first special symbol display device 90.
In response to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by 4A or the second special symbol display device 904B, variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the main image display device 905MA and various other production operations. In order to perform the above, it includes a process of determining a fixed decorative symbol and various effect control patterns according to a variation pattern of a special symbol and a type of display result. When the variable display start setting process is executed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the CPU 90130 uses a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or RAM 90122 (such as the effect control timer setting unit).
Corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the above, processing for reading various control data from the effect control pattern and performing various effect controls during the variable display of the decorative symbol is included. In addition, in the effect processing during variable display, the final stop symbol as the final stop symbol, which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol, is completely stopped and displayed in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 9011. (Derived display) processing is included.
In addition, in response to the fact that the end code is read from the predetermined effect control pattern, the final decoration symbol may be displayed as a complete stop display (derivative display). In this case, when the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command has elapsed,
The variable display result can be fixed by autonomously deriving and displaying the fixed decorative symbol on the side of the effect control board 9012 without using the effect control command from the main board 9011. After performing such effect control and the like, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

The variable display stop process in step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the variable display stop process, the jackpot game state starts based on the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command and the determination result of whether or not the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received. It includes a process of determining whether or not to be performed. Then, when the variable display result corresponds to "big hit" and the big hit game state is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", while the variable display result corresponds to "miss". If the jackpot game state is not started, the effect process flag is cleared and the value is initialized to "0".

The jackpot display process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. This jackpot display process includes a process for executing a jackpot notification effect (fanfare effect) for notifying the start of a jackpot game state based on the reception of a jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011. There is. Then, when the execution of the jackpot notification effect is completed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5".

The jackpot effect process in step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this jackpot effect processing, the CPU 90130 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the jackpot game state executed in the jackpot game state, and displays the effect image based on the set content as the main image display device. 905M
It can be displayed on the screen of A or the sub image display device 905SU, or the illuminant unit 9071-9.
By executing the display effect by 074, outputting the sound and sound effects from the speakers 908L and 908R by outputting the sound effect signal to the audio output board 9013, and outputting the illumination signal to the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F. By turning on, turning off, or blinking the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the decorative LED, and performing other effect controls, it is possible to execute the jackpot medium effect corresponding to the jackpot game state. In the jackpot middle effect processing, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "6" in response to receiving, for example, the jackpot end designation command transmitted from the main board 9011.

The jackpot end effect process in step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this jackpot end effect processing, the CPU 90130 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the jackpot end effect (ending effect) executed when the jackpot game state ends, and the effect image based on the set content. By controlling the display of the image, the output of the fruit sound, the lighting, extinguishing, or blinking of various light emitting members, and other effect operations, it is possible to execute the jackpot end effect corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. After that, the effect process flag is cleared and the value is initialized to "0".

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S90171 of FIG. 46. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 47, the CPU 90
First, the 130 determines a final stop symbol or the like to be a final decorative symbol as a variable display result of the decorative symbol (step S90401). As the process of step S90401, the CPU 90
The 130 determines the final stop symbol based on the variable display contents such as the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result include "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". is there.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not change to the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is ".
It becomes "missing". When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, the final decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed.
The variable display result is "missing". When the variable display content is "non-probability change (big hit)", the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the time saving state. When the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the probable change state.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the CPU 90130 determines different (mismatched) decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R as the final stop symbol. .. The CPU 90130 is a microcomputer 9012 for effect control.
Random number circuit built in (or externally) to 0 or work memory 90131 or RAM 90
From the random numbers for production updated by the random counter for production provided in the predetermined area (effect control counter setting unit, etc.) of 122, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the left fixed symbol is extracted and stored in ROM 90121 in advance. By referring to the left confirmed symbol determination table stored and prepared, the left confirmed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L among the confirmed decorative symbols is determined. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right-determined symbol is extracted from the random numbers for effect, and the right-determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121 is referred to to obtain the final decorative symbol. Of which, the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R
Determine the right fixed decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed at. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right fixed decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-confirmed symbol is extracted from the random numbers for production, and the fixed decorative symbol is determined by referring to the medium-determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121. Of which, "medium" decorative pattern display area 5
Determine the fixed decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed on C.

When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", the CPU 131 determines the same (matching) decorative symbol as the final stop symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R. .. The CPU 90130 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left / right confirmed symbol from the random numbers for the effect, and refers to the left / right confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 to obtain the final decorative symbol. Among them, the decorative symbols having the same stop display symbol numbers are determined in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right".
Furthermore, among the random numbers for production, numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol is extracted, and RO
By referring to the middle-fixed symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in M90121, the middle-fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C among the fixed decorative symbols is determined. Here, for example, when the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol, and the fixed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, an arbitrary value is used. By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol, the fixed decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-fixed decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. ..

CPU90 when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)"
130 is a decorative pattern display area 905L, 905C, 905R of "left", "middle", and "right".
The same (matching) decorative symbol is determined as the final stop symbol. The CPU 90130 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a big hit confirmation symbol from the random numbers for production. Then, R
By referring to the jackpot confirmation symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the OM90121, the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905 of "left", "middle", and "right"
Determines decorative symbols with the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed along with R. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", and whether or not the promotion effect during big hit is executed, a normal symbol (for example, an even number) is displayed. It suffices to determine which of the decorative symbol (shown decorative symbol) and the probabilistic symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating an odd number) is to be the final decorative symbol.
In the jackpot medium promotion effect, the combination of decorative symbols (non-probability variation jackpot combination) that reminds us of the jackpot but does not recall the probability variation state is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the probability variation state during the jackpot game state or at the end of the jackpot gaming state. It is a production that informs whether or not it becomes.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)", a fixed decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. In addition, when it is decided that the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)" and the promotion effect during the big hit is not executed, the definite decoration symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of probabilistic symbols. On the other hand, the variable display content is "
When it is decided to execute the promotion effect during the big hit even if it is "probability change (big hit)", the one that will be the final decorative symbol is decided from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. As a result, even though the probabilistic symbols are aligned and displayed as the definite decorative symbols, it is possible to prevent the big hit middle promotion effect from being executed so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

In the process of step S90401, when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", it is determined whether or not to execute the probabilistic promotion effect such as the re-lottery effect or the big hit medium promotion effect. You may. In the re-lottery effect, once the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, it is once difficult or unrecognizable to be controlled to the probabilistic state. Variable display of decorative patterns again (re-variation)
It is possible to notify that the decorative symbol of the probability variation jackpot combination consisting of the same probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed to be controlled to the probability variation state. In addition, after the decorative symbol is re-variated by the re-lottery effect, the decorative symbol of the non-probability change jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed, so that it may not be notified that the decorative symbol is controlled to the probabilistic state. When it is determined in the process of step S90401 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, a combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the re-lottery effect is executed.

Following the determination of the final stop symbol and the like in step S90401, the advance notice effect is determined (step S90402). In step S90402, the presence or absence of the advance notice effect, the effect mode when the advance notice effect is executed, and the like may be determined by using the advance notice effect determination table prepared, for example, by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 90121 in advance. In the advance notice effect determination table, for example, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value for determining the advance notice effect may be assigned to the presence / absence of the advance notice effect and the determination result of the effect mode according to the variable display content. .. CPU90
Reference numeral 130 is based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the advance notice effect among the random numbers for the effect.
By referring to the advance notice effect determination table, the presence or absence of the advance notice effect and the effect mode may be determined.

Following the determination of the advance notice effect in step S90402, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step S90403). For example, CPU90
The 130 selects one of a plurality of prepared special figure fluctuation effect control patterns corresponding to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, and sets it as a usage pattern. Further, the CPU 90130 selects one of a plurality of prepared advance notice effect control patterns and sets them as a use pattern in accordance with the determination result of the advance notice effect by the process of step S90402.

After determining the effect control pattern in step S90403, the CPU 90130 is provided in a predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the work memory 90131 or RAM 90122, for example, in response to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. The initial value of the effect control process timer is set (step S90404). Then, the setting for starting the fluctuation of the decorative pattern and the like in the main image display device 905MA is made (
Step S90405). At this time, for example, a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined as the pattern to be used in step S90404 is transmitted to the VDP 90140 to be provided on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. "Left", "Middle", "Right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C
, 905R may start the variation of the decorative pattern.

Following the process of step S90405, in response to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the setting for updating the hold storage display in the start winning memory display area 905H is performed (
Step S90406). For example, in the start winning prize storage display area 905H, the display portion corresponding to the hold number "1" may be deleted, and the entire display portion may be moved to the left one by one. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S90407), and then the variable display start setting process ends.

FIG. 48A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 48 (A), the effect control pattern includes, for example, effect control process timer determination value, display control data, voice control data, illuminant control data, movable member control data, operation detection control data, end code, and the like. It is composed of process data including. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the effect control process timer value, which is a stored value of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the work memory 90131 or RAM 90122. ), And the determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. Instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, the main board 9
Corresponding to predetermined control contents and processing contents such as receiving a predetermined effect control command from 011 and executing a predetermined process as a process for controlling the effect operation in the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120. Then, data indicating the switching timing of the effect control and the like may be set. The pattern data constituting such an effect control pattern may be stored in the ROM 90121 in advance as management data.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image on the display screen of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol. It has been. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU. Even if the display data of the effect image on the display screen of the sub-image display device 905SU is added with the display data used for creating the lighting data for controlling the lighting mode by the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. Good. In this case, if the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the sub-image display device 905SU is specified by the display control data, the lighting mode by the plurality of light emitters arranged so as to form the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. Can also be specified. The display control data is not limited to specifying the lighting mode in the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, and the lighting mode in the plurality of light emitters can be determined by using the control data separate from the display control data. It may be specified.

The voice control data includes data showing the voice output mode from the speakers 908L and 908R, such as data showing the output mode of the sound effect linked to the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol. There is. That is, the voice control data is the speaker 90.
This is data that specifies the audio output operation from the 8L and 908R. For example, the voice control data may indicate various settings in the ROM 90121 or the effect data memory 90123A, such as whether or not to perform loop playback, in addition to the start address and end address of the voice data corresponding to the music or the like. ..

The illuminant control data includes, for example, a plurality of illuminants constituting the illuminant units 9071 to 9074, a top frame LED909a, a left frame LED909b, a right frame LED909c, and a decorative LED.
It contains data indicating a lighting operation mode in various light emitting members such as. That is, the light emitting body control data is data that specifies the lighting operation of various light emitting members. The movable member control data includes movable members 9051 to 905, such as data indicating a driving mode of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C for rotating or moving the movable members 9051 to 9054.
Data showing the operation mode of 4 is included. That is, the movable member control data is data that specifies the rotation operation and the movement operation of the movable members 9051 to 9054. The operation detection control data includes, for example, an instruction operation (tilting operation) for the operation stick of the stick controller 9031A.
The operation valid period for effectively detecting the instruction operation (push-pull operation) for the trigger button and the operation valid period for effectively detecting the instruction operation (push-pull operation) for the push button 9031B, and each operation are effectively detected. It includes data indicating the mode of the effect operation according to the operation action of the player, such as data for designating the control content of the effect operation in the case.

It should be noted that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, and the effect control pattern is configured to include a part of the control data according to the content of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be. Further, in the plurality of types of process data included in the effect control pattern, the types of control data constituting each process data may be different depending on the content of the effect operation executed at each timing. That is, some process data includes all of display control data, voice control data, illuminant control data, movable member control data, and operation detection control data, and some process data includes some of these. There may be. Further, various other control data such as the effect model control data indicating the operation mode of the movable member included in the effect model may be included.

FIG. 48B shows various effect operations executed according to the contents of the effect control pattern. The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 determines the control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative symbol is displayed in the manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character is displayed. Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU. In addition, the illuminant unit 9071 to 9074 is specified by the display control data.
Control may be performed to execute the display effect by lighting a plurality of light emitters arranged in line with each other. Further, while controlling to output voice from the speakers 908L and 908R in the mode specified by the voice control data, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 in the mode specified by the light emitter control data, and Top frame LED909a, left frame LED909
b, controls the blinking of various light emitting members such as the right frame LED 909c, and accepts operations on the trigger button, operation stick, or push button 9031B of the stick controller 9031A during the operation validity period specified by the operation detection control data. Control to determine. Dummy data (data for which control is not specified) may be set for the data corresponding to the effect component that is not the control target even if it corresponds to the effect control process timer determination value.

The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 sets the effect control pattern based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, for example, when starting the variable display of the decorative pattern. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 90121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122, or the corresponding effect control may be set. The storage address of the pattern data constituting the pattern in the ROM 90121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122, and the reading position of the stored data in the ROM 90121 may be specified. After that, every time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, and if it matches, the effect operation corresponding to the corresponding various control data is performed. To control. In this way, the CPU 90130 is the effect device (in accordance with the contents of the process data # 1 to the process data # n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern).
Main image display device 905MA, sub image display device 905SU, illuminant unit 9071
~ 9074, speakers 908L, 908R, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, various light emitting members including a top frame LED909a, a left frame LED909b, and a right frame LED909c, movable members 9051 to 9054, decorative members 9057, and the like. ) To advance control. In each process data # 1 to process data # n, display control data # 1 to display control data # n associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to # n,
Voice control data # 1 to voice control data # n, illuminant control data # 1 to illuminant control data #
n, movable member control data # 1 to movable member control data # n, operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data # n indicate the control content of the effect operation in the effect device, and specify the execution of the effect control. Control execution data # 1 to effect control execution data # n are configured.

A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 to the VDP 90140, the audio processing circuit 90143, the general-purpose output controller 90145, and the like. Upon receiving a command from the CPU 90130, the VDP 90140 reads the image data (image element data) indicated by the command from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B and temporarily stores the image data (image element data) in the work area of the VRAM 90141. Further, the VDP 90140 uses the image data stored in the work area of the VRAM 90141 to display the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905S.
Information indicating a predetermined position in the image drawing area of the VRAM 90141 (information indicating a display position in a display area such as the main image display device 905MA) by selecting image data corresponding to the display screen of U and converting the selected image data into pixel data. Place it at the position indicated by etc.). As a result, display data for one screen is created in the image drawing area of the VRAM 90141. At this time, the display data used for creating the lighting data of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 may be added to the display data of the effect image on the display screen of the sub image display device 905SU. In addition, the voice processing circuit 9 that received a command from the CPU 90130
In 0143, the voice data indicated by the command is acquired and temporarily stored in a voice RAM or the like for development.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect processing executed in step S90172 of FIG. In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 49, the CPU 9013
First, 0 determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern has elapsed, based on, for example, the effect control process timer value (step S90451). As an example, in step S90451, the effect control process timer value is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted), and when the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, the variable display is performed. It may be determined that the time has passed.

If the variable display time has not elapsed in step S90451 (step S904)
51; No), it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the super reach effect (step S).
90452). The super reach effect start timing is the timing at which the execution of the reach effect in the super reach is started, and may be predetermined in, for example, the effect control pattern determined in the process of step S90403 shown in FIG. 47. When it is the start timing of the super reach effect (step S90452; Yes), the BGM off setting is performed (step S90453). For example, the CPU 90130 has a voice processing circuit 901.
By the command to 43, the volume of the audio channel for playing BGM is set to off. In the voice processing circuit 90143, for example, the volume of the BGM may be changed to turn off the output. In the period when the BGM is off, only the volume of the BGM is set to off, and the music corresponding to the BGM may be continuously played. Alternatively, BG
During the period when M is off, the playback of the music corresponding to BGM may be suspended.
After the BGM off setting is performed in step S90453, the music on setting for super reach production is performed (step S90454). For example, the CPU 90130 notifies the start address and the end address of the voice data corresponding to the music for the super reach effect by the command to the voice processing circuit 90143. The voice processing circuit 90143 acquires the voice data corresponding to the music for the super reach effect based on the start address and the end address of the voice data notified by the command from the CPU 90130. Then, the volume of the audio channel for reproducing the music for super reach production may be set to on, and the music or the like corresponding to the audio data may be sequentially reproduced from the beginning.

If it is not the super reach effect start timing in step S90452 (step S90452; No), or after the music on setting is performed in step S90454, it is determined whether or not it is the super reach effect end timing (step S90455). The super reach effect end timing is a timing for ending the execution of the reach effect in the super reach, and may be predetermined in, for example, in the effect control pattern determined by the process of step S90403 shown in FIG. 47. When it is the end timing of the super reach effect (step S90455; Yes), the music off setting for the super reach effect is set (step S90456). For example, the CPU 90130 has a voice processing circuit 9
By the command to 0143, the volume of the audio channel for playing the music for super reach production is set to off. In the audio processing circuit 90143, for example, the volume of the music for super reach production may be set to off, and the reproduction of the music or the like may be terminated. After setting the music off for super reach production in step S90456, B
GM on setting is performed (step S90457). For example, the CPU 90130 causes the volume of the audio channel for reproducing the BGM to be turned on by a command to the audio processing circuit 90143. In the voice processing circuit 90143, for example, the volume of the BGM may be changed to turn on the output.

If it is not the end timing of the super reach effect in step S90455 (step S90455; No), or after the BGM on setting is performed in step S90457,
For example, after performing other effect operation control including the variable display operation of the decorative pattern based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined in response to the fluctuation pattern (step S9).
0458), the effect processing during variable display is terminated.

When the variable display time has elapsed in step S90451 (step S90451;
Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received (step S90459). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S90459; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated and the device waits. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so.

When the symbol confirmation command is received in step S90459 (step S90)
459; Yes), for example, the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol, such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP90140.
Is derived and displayed (step S90460). In addition, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command (step S90461). Then, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the variable display stop process (step S90462), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 49, the music off setting for super reach effect is set in step S90456, and then the BGM on setting is immediately performed in step S90457. On the other hand, the BGM on setting may be performed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the music off setting is performed in step S90456. For example, the BGM on setting may be performed after the control for deriving and displaying the final stop symbol is performed in step S90460. Alternatively, the BGM on setting may be performed when the variable display start waiting process of step S90170 shown in FIG. 46 is executed. In particular, when the variable display result is "big hit", the variable display result is "" following the music off setting for super reach production.
You may play the music for the fanfare production that notifies that the "big hit" has occurred, and then play the music for the production during the big hit in response to the game state becoming the big hit game state. The music for super reach production may be a music for production during a big hit as it is and may be continuously played. When the variable display result becomes "big hit" in this way, the BGM on setting can be performed in response to the execution of the variable display start waiting process in step S90170 shown in FIG. Good. As a result, the variable display result is "
When it becomes a "big hit", the playback of the music that becomes BGM can be smoothly started.

In the variable display in-display effect processing shown in FIG. 49, the effect control process timer value is based on the effect control pattern (for example, the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates, the advance notice effect control pattern, etc.) determined in the process of step S9403 shown in FIG. Using the process data acquired in the above, control is performed to execute the effect operation by various effect devices. Step S shown in FIG.
Also in the big hit middle effect processing of 90175 and the big hit end effect process of step S90176, the CPU 90130 reads the effect control pattern from the ROM 90121 and the like, and uses the process data acquired based on the effect control process timer value by various effect devices. Controls for executing the effect operation may be performed.

In order to perform such effect control, the CPU 90130 determines whether or not the effect control process timer has timed out, and when the time-out occurs, the CPU 90130 switches the effect control execution data in the process data. That is, process data # 1 as shown in FIG. 48 (A).
~ In the process data # n, a plurality of light emissiones arranged in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 together with the display control of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU based on the display control data set next. The lighting control of the body may be performed. Further, in the process data # 1 to the process data # n, the voice output control of the speakers 908L and 908R is performed based on the voice control data set next. Further, in the process data # 1 to the process data # n, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter unit 9071 to 9074 based on the light emitter control data set next, and the top frame L
Lighting control of the ED909a, the left frame LED909b, the right frame LED909c, and the decorative LED is performed. In the process data # 1 to process data # n, the drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C is performed based on the movable member control data set next. In addition, in the process data # 1 to process data # n, the stick controller 9031A and the push button 903 are based on the operation detection control data set next.
The detection control of the instruction operation by 1B is performed.

In the effect control microcomputer 90120, the VDP 90140 is the CPU 9
Based on the display control command from 0130, various image data such as character image data necessary for displaying the effect image are read from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B and arranged in a predetermined area of the VRAM 90141. When displaying the effect image, the same character image may be displayed repeatedly. Production data memory 90123A, 90
When the image data stored in 123B is compressed, it takes time to decompress it after reading it. Therefore, at the stage of starting the display of the effect image, by arranging the necessary character image data or the like in the storage area of the VRAM 90141, compared with reading from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B corresponding to each frame. , The time required for drawing can be shortened.

The CPU 90130 will perform every time a V blank occurs after the display of the effect image is started.
After setting the attribute in the attribute register of VDP90140, instruct to read and execute the attribute. In response, the VDP90140 reads the attributes. When this reading is completed, the reading end interrupt signal is output from the VDP 90140 to the CPU 90130. Upon receiving the read end interrupt signal, the CPU 90130 instructs the execution of the drawing process. In this way, the VDP 90140 executes the drawing process by writing the display data to the VRAM 90141 according to the read attribute.

A main frame buffer and a subframe buffer are allocated to each of the plurality of storage areas to which the image display area and the image drawing area are allocated in the VRAM 90141. In the mainframe buffer, display data for displaying an image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA is stored. For example, the mainframe buffer is allocated a memory area capable of storing pixel data of 800 dots in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and 600 dots in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction). The subframe buffer contains the subimage display device 9
Display data for displaying an image on the screen of 05SU may be stored, and display data used for creating lighting data for lighting control of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 may be stored. For example, the subframe buffer is allocated a memory area capable of storing pixel data of 480 dots in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and 885 dots in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction).

The image data used to create the lighting data for controlling the lighting of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 corresponds to, for example, an image size of 320 dots in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and 320 dots in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction). There is. The VDP90140 reduces the image data for creating lighting data to an image size of 80 dots in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and 80 dots in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction). The reduced image size is the illuminant unit 907 in which a plurality of illuminants are arranged in an aligned manner.
It supports resolutions from 1 to 9074. In this way, the image data for creating lighting data is
It has a resolution higher than that of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. As an example, anti-aliasing processing such as super sampling is performed. As another example, by acquiring the RGB values corresponding to the upper left dots for each rectangular range of 4 dots x 4 dots in the vertical and horizontal directions in the image data and using them as display data, the vertical and horizontal directions are 1/4 each. Display data reduced to may be created. In this way, the display data to be converted into the lighting data is created by using the image data having a resolution higher than the resolution of the display by the plurality of light emitters.
Thereby, for example, jaggies generated in the contour of a character image or the like can be suppressed, and the smoothness of display in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 can be improved. In particular, when an effect image such as a character image is moved and displayed, the contour portion can be smoothly displayed to improve the interest of the display effect in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. The reduction of the image size may be performed in the image data deformation processing or the display data drawing processing by the VDP 90140, or may be performed by using a predetermined scaler circuit. The scaler circuit may reduce the image size at a predetermined reduction rate (for example, 1/4) by converting the number of pixels of the display data read from the VRAM 90141. As described above, the size change of the display data may be realized by a hardware circuit or by executing a predetermined program as software.

The image data read by the VDP 90140 may be used for creating lighting data by being written in a predetermined area (light emitter lighting data area) in the subframe buffer. On the other hand, the image data read by the VDP 90140 is written to the mainframe buffer and used for displaying an image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. Further, the image data read by the VDP 90140 is written in an area other than the light emitter lighting data area in the subframe buffer, and is used for displaying an image on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU. In this way, even if the image data is the same, VR
It suffices if the application can be different depending on the writing position in AM90141. In this way, the VRAM 9014 is read from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B.
The image data temporarily stored in 1 is for displaying an image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, or the illuminant unit 9071 to 907.
It suffices if it can also be used for creating lighting data for controlling lighting of 4. Therefore, the image data stored in the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B is at least one of the effect image display control in the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU and the lighting control of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. It can be used for either control.

The display data stored in the subframe buffer is, for example, 1/60 second for one frame (
It is output in about 16.7 milliseconds). As a result, the sub-image display device 905SU becomes 1/6.
The displayed image can be updated with a frame cycle of 0 seconds. When the data for controlling the illuminant is also added to the data for displaying the sub-image, it can be output at a cycle of 1/60 second. In the light emitting body control board 9016C, the effect control board 90 is passed through the effect control relay board 9016A.
The display data transmitted from No. 12 is temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151. Therefore, the buffer memory 90151 may store the data for controlling the illuminant at a cycle of 1/60 second in which the VDP 90140 outputs the display data for one frame.

In the light emitter control board 9016C, the lighting data generation circuit 90152 has a shorter cycle than the frame cycle (1/60 second, etc.) of an image display device using an LCD (liquid crystal display device) such as the sub image display device 905SU. Lighting data for controlling lighting of a plurality of light emitters may be generated. As a specific example, the lighting data generation circuit 90152 is 1/1.
Lighting data for controlling lighting of the illuminant is generated at a cycle of 20 seconds (about 8.3 milliseconds).
In this way, the lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data of the light emitter in a cycle (1/120 seconds) shorter than the output cycle (1/60 seconds) of the display data by the VDP 90140, and the serial output circuit 90153 generates lighting data. The control signal based on the lighting data is output. In this case, the buffer memory 90151 is the data for light emission control included in the display data corresponding to the image display for one frame output from the VDP 90140, that is, 80 dots × 8.
It suffices to have a storage data capacity capable of storing 0-dot illuminant control data. Further, by turning on the light emitting body in a relatively short cycle, the light emitting body units 9071 to 9074
It is possible to suppress flicker in the display effect executed by a plurality of light emitters arranged in each of the above, and improve the interest of the display effect. The lighting control of the illuminant is
It is not limited to the one performed at a cycle of 1/2 with respect to the output cycle of the display data, and at any cycle shorter than the output cycle of the display data, for example, a shorter cycle (for example, a cycle of 1/3). Anything that is done will do.

The serial output circuit 90153 lights up generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 at a cycle longer than the time required for the light emission control data included in the display data corresponding to the image display for one frame to be written to the buffer memory 90151. It may be set to output the control signal corresponding to the data. In this way, the data for light emission control corresponding to one frame is temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151 in a time shorter than the cycle in which the control signal corresponding to the lighting data is output. As a result, even when the buffer memory 90151 having a storage data capacity capable of temporarily storing the data for light emission control corresponding to one frame is used, the lighting data can be stored in a time shorter than the output cycle of the control signal corresponding to the lighting data. The generation can be completed.

The buffer memory 90151 has a storage data capacity that can store data for light emission control included in the display data corresponding to the image display for a plurality of frames, such as the display data corresponding to the image display for two frames. You may be. In this case, the buffer memory 9
A plurality of buffer areas are allocated to the storage area of 0151. Each buffer area is 1
It suffices to have a storage data capacity capable of storing data for light emission control included in the display data corresponding to the image display for the frame.

The lighting data generation circuit 90152 divides the data into a plurality of data ranges according to the storage position (read address or the like) of the buffer memory 90151 that stores the data for light emission control. For example, the storage area of the buffer memory 90151 is divided into a plurality of buffer memory areas according to the storage address and the like. The lighting data generation circuit 90152
Based on which buffer memory area the data stored in is read, it is specified which of the plurality of illuminant blocks B01 to B42 is converted into the lighting data of the illuminant included in the illuminant block.

The display data temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151 is assigned to any of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 for each of a plurality of divided data ranges. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 can specify the data range assigned to each light emitter block B01 to B42 by referring to the address identification table which is the conversion setting information prepared in advance. Based on this specific result, the address information of the illuminant driver provided corresponding to each illuminant block B01 to B42 can be specified. The address identification table may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM built in (or externally attached to) the lighting data generation circuit 90152. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data including address information, and outputs the lighting data to the light emitter drive unit 90154 by the serial output circuit 90153.

Further, the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 includes gradation data indicating the gradation control amount of each light emitting element constituting each of the plurality of light emitting bodies. For example, the gradation data may indicate the output period (pulse width) of the pulse signal in PWM control as the gradation control amount. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 is a buffer memory 90.
By referring to the lighting data generation table which is the color conversion setting information prepared in advance based on the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data read from 151,
Generates gradation data indicating the amount of gradation control. The lighting data generation table may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM built in (or externally attached to) the lighting data generation circuit 90152.

The lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 corresponds to a number of gradations smaller than the number of gradations of the image displayed based on the display data used for the conversion. For example, the display data transmitted from the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A and temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151 is for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). 2 so that the brightness (gradation) is at any level of "0" to "255"
Gradation control is possible in 56 steps. As described above, the number of gradations of the image displayed based on the display data transmitted from the effect control board 9012 is "256". The lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 has a brightness (gradation) of any one of "0" to "63" for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). 64 to reach the level of
Enables gradation control in stages. As described above, the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 shows the number of gradations of "64", which is less than "256".

The correspondence between the level (RGB value) of each display color shown in the display data and the gradation control amount of each light emitting element indicated by the gradation data included in the lighting data of the illuminant is the light emission corresponding to each emission color. It may be determined in advance in consideration of the characteristics of the element (for example, luminous efficiency), white balance, and the like. As an example, a light emitting diode, which is a light emitting element constituting each light emitting body, has a non-linear characteristic in which the amount of current rapidly increases when the applied voltage reaches a predetermined value. Therefore, if the gradation control amount is converted to a gradation control amount proportional to the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data, there is a possibility that inconvenience of display effect by a plurality of light emitters such as overexposure and underexposure may occur. is there. Therefore, the lighting data from the display data so that the light emitting element corresponding to each light emitting color constituting each of the plurality of light emitting bodies has a light emitting amount equivalent to the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data. The setting information at the time of conversion to is may be stored in advance as a lighting data generation table.

FIG. 50 shows a configuration example of the lighting data generation table TC1 referred to by the lighting data generation circuit 90152. In the lighting data generation table TC1, the level (R) of each display color indicated by the lighting data corresponds to the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data.
GB value) is set. Here, R (red), G (green), and B (shown in the display data)
When the brightness (gradation) of each display color of (blue) is at any level of "0" to "10", the brightness (gradation) of each display color indicated by the lighting data is " The table data may be configured so as to have a level of "0". That is, when the brightness (gradation) shown in the display data of the light emitting element of each display color included in one light emitting body corresponding to one dot is "10" or less, the brightness of each display color By generating lighting data in which (gradation) is "0", a limit is set so as not to light the light emitter.

On the other hand, the lighting data generation table TC1 has R (red) and G (green) indicated by the display data.
, B (blue) display color is proportional to the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated in the display data when the brightness (gradation) of at least one of them is at a level of "11" or higher. R
The table data may be configured so that lighting data indicating the GB value is generated. For example, when the brightness (gradation) of B (blue) shown in the display data is "11", the brightness (gradation) of B (blue) shown in the lighting data is "2". If the brightness of R (red) or G (green) indicated by the display data is "0" to "3", lighting data indicating that the brightness (gradation) is "0" is generated, and "4". If it is ~ "7", lighting data indicating that the brightness (gradation) is "1" is generated, and if it is "8" to "11", lighting data indicating that the brightness (gradation) is "2" is generated. As described above, the table data of the lighting data generation table TC1 is configured.

The image data read by the VDP 90140 from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B by the effect control microcomputer 90120 is the main image display device 905MA.
Alternatively, for displaying an image on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU and the light emitter unit 90.
It may also be used for creating lighting data for controlling lighting of 71 to 9074. At this time, when the brightness (gradation) of each display color indicated by the display data created from the image data used for image display is less than a predetermined amount, the proportional relationship is the same as when the amount is more than a predetermined amount. When the lighting data is generated below, the influence of the non-linear characteristics on the light emitting diode becomes remarkable.
There is a risk that an unnatural display effect will be produced. Therefore, according to the brightness (gradation) of each display color indicated by the display data, when the amount of light emitted by the light emitting body is less than a predetermined amount, a limitation is provided on the lighting control so as not to light the light emitting body. In this way, the lighting control is different between the light emitting body having a light emitting amount of less than a predetermined amount and the light emitting body having a light emitting amount of a predetermined amount or more among the plurality of light emitting bodies. In particular, in this embodiment, while limiting the lighting control of the illuminant whose emission amount is less than a predetermined amount according to the RGB value of the display data is provided, the illuminant whose emission amount is a predetermined amount or more is set. Is controlled according to the RGB value of the lighting data, which is proportional to the RGB value of the display data. In this way, by making the lighting control different depending on whether or not the amount of light emitted is less than a predetermined amount, the influence of the non-linear characteristics of the light emitting element is reduced, and the player is not given a sense of discomfort in the display effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming less interesting.

Multiple types of lighting data generation tables are prepared in advance, and based on predetermined selection settings,
Any lighting data generation table may be selected as the used table. In this case, a different lighting data generation table may be selected for each emission color of the light emitting element included in each light emitting body. For example, in the case of the light emitter blocks B01 to B06, the lighting data generation table TR01 is selected according to the emission color R (red), and the lighting data generation table TG01 is selected according to the emission color G (green). Lights up according to the color B (blue) Data generation table TB
01 is selected. On the other hand, in the case of the light emitter blocks B07, B08, and B15, the lighting data generation table TR02 is selected according to the light emission color R (red), and the light emission color is G (green).
The lighting data generation table TG02 is selected according to the above, and the lighting data generation table TB02 is selected according to the emission color B (blue). Further, in the case of the light emitting body blocks B09 to B14, the lighting data generation table TR03 is selected according to the light emitting color R (red), and the light emitting color is G.
The lighting data generation table TG03 is selected according to (green), and the lighting data generation table TB03 is selected according to the emission color B (blue). Each lighting data generation table is
Includes table data that converts the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data created by VDP141 into the gradation control amount of each light emitting element indicated by the gradation data included in the lighting data of the light emitter. It may be composed of. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 is designated by the lighting data by referring to the selected lighting data generation table based on the level (RGB value) of each display color shown in the display data read from the buffer memory 90151. Determine the gradation control amount.

The characteristics of the light emitting element may differ depending on the light emitting color. Therefore, the display data is converted into a gradation control amount whose correspondence with the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data is different according to the emission color of each light emitting element constituting the light emitting body. The setting information when converting from to lighting data may be stored in advance as a lighting data generation table.

It suffices if the display data can be converted into lighting data by using different lighting data generation tables according to the arrangement of each of the plurality of light emitters corresponding to each light emitting body block. Luminescent unit 90
In each of 71 to 9074, even if the same gradation is emitted according to the arrangement of each of the plurality of illuminants, depending on the size of the area where the plurality of illuminants are aligned and the front-rear relationship of each illuminant unit. It may give a different impression to the player. Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of each of the plurality of light emitters corresponding to each light emitter block, the lighting data is obtained from the display data so that the light emission amount corresponds to the same display color and gives an impression as close to uniform as possible. The setting information at the time of conversion to is stored in advance as a lighting data generation table.

In this way, not only the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data, but also the light emitting characteristics of each of the plurality of light emitting elements constituting the light emitting body, the arrangement of the plurality of light emitting bodies, and the like, each light emitting body Gradation data indicating the gradation control amount according to is generated. As a result, a light emitter containing a plurality of types of light emitting elements having different emission colors can be generated by the light emitter units 9071 to 907.
Even when they are arranged in a predetermined area of 4, the color reproducibility is enhanced and the interest of the production is improved.

It should be noted that all the lighting data is not limited to those generated by referring to the lighting data generation table, and at least a part of the lighting data is generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 executing a predetermined data processing program. May be done. For example, for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) shown in the display data, it is determined whether or not the amount of light emitted is less than the predetermined amount, and all the amounts of light emitted are less than the predetermined amount. In that case, a process of generating lighting data having a brightness (gradation) of "0" may be executed so as not to light the light emitting body.

As an example, in the lighting data generation process executed by the lighting data generation circuit 90152,
The display data for one dot is acquired, and all the RGB values shown in the display data are "10".
It is determined whether or not it is less than or equal to. Then, when all are "10" or less, all the RGB values in the lighting data are set to "0". On the other hand, when at least one of the RGB values shown in the display data is not "10" or less, the lighting data generation table corresponding to the light emitting body block and the light emitting color is selected. Subsequently, the lighting data corresponding to the display data is generated by using the selected lighting data generation table. Then, it is determined whether or not the generation of the lighting data corresponding to all the dots is completed, and if the generation of the lighting data is not completed yet, the display data corresponding to the next 1 dot is acquired and the same processing is performed. It may be executed repeatedly. on the other hand,
When the generation of lighting data corresponding to all dots is completed, the lighting data generation process may be terminated.

The lighting data generation process is not limited to the one that generates lighting data by referring to the lighting data generation table, and lighting data may be generated by executing a predetermined arithmetic processing program. For example, in the display data that enables gradation control in 256 steps for each display color, the brightness (gradation) of each display color is represented by 8 bits in the case of binary display. on the other hand,
In the lighting data that enables gradation control in 64 steps for each display color, the brightness (gradation) of each display color is represented by 6 bits in the case of binary display. Therefore, the RG shown in the display data
When at least one of the B values is not "10" or less, the lighting data is displayed by performing numerical processing that truncates the lower 2 bits of the 8-bit data indicating the brightness (gradation) of each display color in the display data. It may be generated. Alternatively, lighting data corresponding to the display data may be generated according to a preset calculation formula. Prepare multiple types of arithmetic processing programs that can be used to convert display data to lighting data in advance.
The lighting data generation circuit 90152 may convert the display data into lighting data by selecting and executing one of the arithmetic processing programs according to the display color and arrangement (light emitting body block, etc.) of the light emitting element.

The display data is not limited to the one that acquires the display data for each dot and sets and generates the lighting data. For example, the lighting data may be set and generated collectively by using predetermined mask data. In this case, dots having all RGB values of "10" or less are detected in the display data for one frame temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151, and RGB in the lighting data corresponding to the detected dots is used. Mask data for setting all the values to "0" may be prepared in advance.

The RGB values shown in the display data for one dot are not limited to those set to be "0" when all the RGB values in the lighting data are "0" or less.
If any of the RGB values shown in the display data for one dot is "10" or less, set so that only the lighting data corresponding to the display color is "0". May be good. As an example, the brightness (gradation) of R (red) shown in the display data is "100", G (green).
When the brightness (gradation) of is "8" and the brightness (gradation) of B (blue) is "2", the brightness (gradation) of R (red) indicated by the lighting data is "25". On the other hand, the table data of the lighting data generation table may be configured so that the brightness (gradation) of G (green) and B (blue) is "0", or the lighting data generation circuit 90152 may be used. A predetermined arithmetic processing program may be executed. As described above, for each light emitting element of each display color in the light emitting body, a restriction may be provided so as not to perform lighting control of the light emitting body in which the amount of light emitted is less than a predetermined amount according to the RGB value of the display data. However, if there is a display color whose RGB value is "10" or less in the display data for one dot, and only that display color is set to "0" in the lighting data, the tint of the emission color May change. Therefore, when all the RGB values shown in the display data for one dot are "10" or less, all the RGB values in the lighting data are "0".
It is desirable to set so as to be.

Alternatively, the RGB values indicated by the display data for one dot may be added so that when the total value is less than a predetermined value, all the RGB values in the lighting data are set to "0". As an example, when the total value obtained by adding the brightness (gradation) of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) shown in the display data is "30" or less, it is shown in the lighting data. R (red),
The table data of the lighting data generation table may be configured so that the brightness (gradation) of G (green) and B (blue) are all "0", or the lighting data generation circuit 90152 performs a predetermined arithmetic process. You may run the program. In this case, even if the brightness (gradation) of R (red) shown in the display data is "11", the brightness (gradation) of G (green) and B (blue) is "0". If so, the brightness (gradation) of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) indicated by the lighting data is all "0". In this way, the total amount of light emitted by the plurality of light emitting elements constituting one light emitting body (
By setting a limit so as not to control the lighting of the illuminant whose total amount) is less than a predetermined amount, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the display effect and to prevent the effect from being lowered. ..

According to the RGB value of the display data, the amount of light emitted is not limited to a limit so as not to control the lighting of the light emitting body, and the influence of the non-linear characteristics of the light emitting element is taken into consideration. Therefore, arbitrary restrictions may be provided. As an example, if the brightness (gradation) of each display color shown in the display data is "0" to "8", the brightness (gradation) is "0".
The table data of the lighting data generation table is configured so that the lighting data indicating "1" is generated, and the lighting data indicating the brightness (gradation) of "1" is generated if it is "9" or "10". Alternatively, the lighting data generation circuit 90152 may execute a predetermined arithmetic processing program. In this way, when the brightness (gradation) of each display color indicated by the display data is less than a predetermined amount, the lighting control is restricted so that the lighting control is performed in a correspondence relationship different from the proportional relationship when the amount is more than the predetermined amount. May be provided. Further, the threshold value of whether or not the amount of light emitted by the light emitting body is less than a predetermined amount is not limited to the RGB value of "10" in the display data, and the influence of the non-linear characteristics of the light emitting element is taken into consideration. Any value may be set as long as it is set. Depending on the emission color (display color) of the light emitting element, the threshold value for whether or not the amount of emission is less than a predetermined amount may be set to be different.

The image data stored in the effect data memory 90123A and 90123B is not limited to the one used for both display control and lighting control, and dedicated image data is prepared for creating lighting data, and the effect data memory is prepared in advance. It may be stored in 90123A and 90123B. In this case, the image data is preset so that the light emitting body whose lighting amount is less than a predetermined amount when the lighting data is generated in a proportional relationship with the display data is not lit without lighting control. You may do so. Lighting data may be created using the light emission data stored in the effect data memory 90123C. In this case as well, the light emission data may be set in advance so that the light emitting body whose light emission amount is less than a predetermined amount is not lit without lighting control.

The lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data including gradation data to which the address information assigned to the light emitter driver on the upper digit side or the lower side of the digit is added.
The serial output circuit 90153 outputs the output to the light emitter drive unit 90154. Further, the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 includes drive control data for dynamically lighting and controlling a plurality of light emitters for each of the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data including drive control data to which the address information assigned to the light emitting body driver on the strobe side is added, and outputs the lighting data to the light emitting body driving unit 90154 by the serial output circuit 90153.

The serial output circuit 90153 outputs a common clock signal to the plurality of serial output systems K01 to K21 as the serial clock SC shown in FIG. 28. The serial clock SC output from the serial output circuit 90153 is supplied to each of the plurality of light emitter drivers included in the light emitter drive unit 90154 via the serial signal wiring. Each illuminant driver is a serial data SD transmitted in synchronization with the serial clock SC.
To receive.

On the other hand, the serial output circuit 90153 may output a control signal including drive control data and gradation data as serial data SD at different timings according to each of the serial output systems K01 to K21. When control signals are output to each of the serial output systems K01 to K21 at the same timing, lighting control of a large number of illuminants at the same timing is performed by a large number of illuminant drivers included in the illuminant drive unit 90154. May be started. In this case, a large amount of drive current flows as an inrush current in a short period of time, which may cause radio interference due to noise radio waves or the like. In addition, the manufacturing cost may increase due to the need for a power supply circuit for generating a large amount of drive current. On the contrary,
By outputting the control signal that becomes the serial data SD at different timings according to each of the plurality of serial output systems K01 to K21, the generation of inrush current is suppressed and the generation of noise radio waves and the increase in manufacturing cost are prevented. can do.

In the illuminant drive unit 90154, each illuminant driver receives the serial data SD.
It is confirmed whether or not the illuminant driver address indicated by the address information included in is matched with the illuminant driver address assigned to oneself. At this time, if they match, the serial data SD which becomes the drive control data and the gradation data is taken in, converted into parallel data, and the lighting control of the illuminant is performed based on this. For example, the illuminant driver on the strobe side drives and controls a plurality of illuminants connected to the strobe signal line by outputting a strobe signal based on the drive control data. Further, the illuminant driver on the upper side of the digit or the lower side of the digit outputs a digit signal based on the gradation data to control the gradation of a plurality of illuminants connected to the digit signal line. In this way, the dynamic lighting control of the plurality of illuminants is performed for each of the plurality of illuminant blocks B01 to B42, and the illuminant units 9071 to 9074 included in the movable members 9051 to 9054 constituting the effect movable mechanism 9050 are arranged. A display effect is performed according to the lighting mode of the plurality of arranged light emitters.

As an example of a specific display effect by the effect movable mechanism 9050, in the retracted state (first state) in which the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are separated and the display screen of the main image display device 905MA can be visually recognized. , A display effect using a plurality of light emitters arranged on the movable members 9051 to 9054 that can be visually recognized by the player is executed in conjunction with the display effect by the main image display device 905MA. In the retracted state, the movable members 9051 and 9052 are located above and the movable members 9053 and 9054 are located below. In this way, the movable member 905
When 1 to 9054 is not rotating and is in the retracted state (when stopped), only the light emitting body that can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to light up among the plurality of light emitting bodies.
As a result, power consumption can be reduced. As a display effect by controlling the lighting of the light emitter, for example, characters and symbols are displayed, and blinking and emission colors of a plurality of light emitters are moved in a predetermined order to be variable according to the variable display by the main image display device 905MA. Display effects and the like may be executed. Further, when the reach effect is executed, the movable member 9
At least one of 051 to 9054 may be moved (vibration, advance, etc.), or a plurality of light emitters may be used to display characters or symbols such as "reach".

On the other hand, the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are close to each other and the main image display device 9
In the advanced state (second state) in which the display screen of 05MA is difficult to see or cannot be seen, the display effect using all of the plurality of light emitters arranged on the movable members 9051 to 9054 is displayed by the main image display device 905MA. In conjunction with, or the main image display device 905MA
It is executed independently of the display effect by. When in the advanced state, the production movable mechanism 9050
As the decorative member 9057 moves downward in the upper mechanism of the movable member 9051, 905.
As the 2 rotates, the movable members 9053 and 9054 of the lower mechanism are located above. In this way, when the movable members 9051 to 9054 are in the advanced state (when they are operating) in the rotating operation, all of the plurality of light emitters are controlled to be lit.

The integrated display effect on the movable members 9051 to 9054 may be started before or during the change of the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 from the retracted state to the advanced state. In this way, when the movable members 9051 to 9054 are rotating, all the plurality of light emitters may be turned on to perform the display effect regardless of whether or not they are visible from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 901. As a result, the effect of rotating the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be increased. Further, by lighting all the plurality of light emitters regardless of whether or not they can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the light emitters for which lighting control is not performed can be visually recognized by the player by simple control. Can be suppressed.

The ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C mounted on the effect control board 9012 as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23 are provided with a plurality of storage areas according to the storage contents. For example, the ROM 90121 has a program management area R01 that serves as a first storage area for storing programs for effect control and various management data, and a voice data first storage area that serves as a second storage area for storing voice data. R11 and the like are provided.
In the effect data memory 90123A, the audio data second storage area R12 is stored as a storage area for storing the audio data, and the image data first is stored as the storage area for storing the image data.
A storage area R21 is provided. The effect data memory 90123B is provided with an image data second storage area R22 as a storage area for storing image data. Speakers 908 are located in the voice data first storage area R11 and the voice data second storage area R12.
Audio data used to control the audio output by R, 908L is stored. In the image data first storage area R21 and the image data second storage area R22, together with the image data used for controlling the display of the effect image in the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, the light emitter unit 9071 to Image data used for lighting control in a plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment with 9074 may be stored.

FIG. 51 (A) shows the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121, and
A configuration example of audio data stored in the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 51 (A), the start address and the end address in the voice data first storage area R11 and the voice data second storage area R12 in which the respective voice data are stored correspond to a plurality of songs. It is set. For example, the audio data corresponding to the music A-1 is used to reproduce the normal BGM in the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the normal state, and is stored in the section from the start address MA02 to the end address MA03. There is. The audio data corresponding to the music A-2 is used to reproduce the effect sound at the time of the super reach effect in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed, and is stored in the section from the start address MA03 + 1 to the end address MA05. .. The audio data corresponding to the music A-1 and the music A-2 may be stored in the audio data first storage area R11.

The audio data corresponding to the music B-1 of FIG. 51 (A) is used to reproduce the BGM in the probabilistic change state in which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the probable change state, and the start address MA1
It is stored in the section from 9 + 1 to the end address MA21. Here, the start address MA09 + 1 of the music B-1 has an address value smaller than the address MA10 which is the final address of the ROM 90121, and is included in the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 which provides the first area. There is. On the other hand, the end address MA of music B-1
1a has an address value larger than the address MA10, which is the final address of the ROM 90121, and is included in the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A that provides the second area. In this way, the audio data corresponding to the music B-1 is
The audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 9
It is stored straddling both the voice data second storage area R12 provided in 0123A. The audio data corresponding to the music B-2 is used to reproduce the BGM in the time saving state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the time saving state, and is stored in the section from the start address MA1a + 1 to the end address MA1c. .. The audio data corresponding to music X is
It is used to reproduce the effect sound during the jackpot in which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the jackpot gaming state, and is stored in the section from the start address MA1g + 1 to the end address MA11. The audio data corresponding to the music B-2 and the music X may be stored in the audio data second storage area R12.

The audio data corresponding to the music B-1 shown in FIG. 51 (A) is both the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. It is remembered straddling. Even in this case, since the audio data first storage area R11 and the audio data second storage area R12 are provided in the portions of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90123A to which continuous addresses are assigned, the music B-1 is reproduced. Occasionally, as in the case of playing other songs, the start address and end address of the audio data are specified, the read address is updated sequentially from the start address, and the audio data is read to correspond to the song B-1. The voice data to be used can be read appropriately.

51 (B1) to 51 (B4) are timing diagrams showing an operation example of playing a musical piece in the pachinko gaming machine 901. Of these, FIG. 51 (B1) shows a period of "execution" in which the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol is being executed and "stop" in which the variable display is stopped. FIG. 51 (B2) shows the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901. FIG. 51 (B3) is shown in FIG. 51 (A).
) Is shown, among a plurality of songs that can be played using audio data, the songs to be played are shown. FIG. 51 (B4) shows an audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and an audio data second storage area R provided in the effect data memory 90123A.
Of the above, the storage area to be read out of the voice data is shown.

Execution of the variable display shown in FIG. 51 (B1) is started before the timing T01 is reached. At this time, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 shown in FIG. 51 (B2) is the normal state. If the reach effect in the super reach is not executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern in the normal state, the music A as the normal BGM shown in FIG. 51 (A).
The audio data corresponding to the music A-1 is read from the section from the start address MA02 to the end address MA03 so that -1 is reproduced in a loop. The section from the start address MA02 to the end address MA03 is included in the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121. Therefore, until the timing T01 is reached, FIG. 51 (B)
As shown in 3), the loop reproduction of the music A-1 to be reproduced is performed, and as shown in FIG. 51 (B4), the audio data first storage area R11 becomes the audio data read target area.

After that, at the timing T01, the reach effect in the super reach is started. At this time, the process of step S90452 shown in FIG. 49 determines that it is the start timing of the super reach effect, so that the process of step S90453 sets the BGM off. Then, the music on setting for super reach production is performed by the process of step S90454. In this way, during the period when the reach effect in the super reach is executed, the section from the start address MA03 + 1 to the end address MA05 is played so that the music A-2 for the super reach effect shown in FIG. 51 (A) is played. , The audio data corresponding to the music A-2 is read out. The section from the start address MA03 + 1 to the end address MA05 is
It is included in the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121. Therefore, from the start timing of the super reach effect at the timing T01 to the end timing of the super reach effect at the timing T02, the music A-2 is the target of reproduction as shown in FIG. 51 (B3). As shown in 51 (B4), the voice data first storage area R11 becomes the voice data read target area.

At the timing T02, the process of step S90455 shown in FIG. 49 determines that the super reach effect end timing is reached. At this time, the process of step S90456 sets the music off for the super reach effect, and the process of step S90457 sets the BGM on. After that, at timing T03, the variable display result is "big hit".
As shown in FIG. 51 (B2), the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. In addition, when the variable display result becomes a "big hit", for example, a dedicated music for notifying that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" may be played in the period from timing T02 to timing T03. .. Even when the variable display result is "missing", a dedicated music corresponding to the execution of the reach effect in the super reach may be played. Alternatively, the music A-2 for super reach production may be continuously played until the timing T03 is reached. Alternatively, the playback of the music may be paused in order to clearly notify the variable display result.

When the jackpot game state is entered at the timing T03, the sound corresponding to the music X is played from the section from the start address MA1g + 1 to the end address MA11 so that the music X for the production during the jackpot shown in FIG. 51 (A) is played. The data is read. The section from the start address MA1g + 1 to the end address MA11 is included in the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. Therefore, from the time when the big hit game state is reached at timing T03 to the end of the big hit game state at timing T04, FIG. 51 (
As shown in B3), the musical piece X is the target of reproduction, and as shown in FIG. 51 (B4), the audio data second storage area R12 is the audio data read target area.

At the timing T04, the jackpot gaming state ends, and the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the probabilistic state. At this time, it is determined in step S90151 shown in FIG. 46 that it is the BGM change timing. Then, by the processing of steps S90152 and S153, the music B-1 is played from the section from the start address MA09 + 1 to the end address MA1a so that the music B-1 as the probabilistic BGM shown in FIG.
The voice data corresponding to is read out. Start address MA09 + 1 to end address MA
The section up to 1a is included in both the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. Therefore, when the music B-1 is loop-reproduced in the probabilistic state, the audio data read-out target area becomes the audio data first storage area R11 of the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 of the effect data memory 90123A. There is a period. For example, in the period from timing T04 to timing T08, loop reproduction of the music B-1 to be reproduced is performed as shown in FIG. 51 (B3). In this period, in the period from timing T04 to timing T05 and the period from timing T06 to timing T07, the audio data first storage area R11 becomes the audio data read target area as shown in FIG. 51 (B4). .. On the other hand, in the period from timing T05 to timing T06 and the period from timing T07 to timing T08, the audio data second storage area R12 becomes the audio data read target area as shown in FIG. 51 (B4).
Even in the period after the timing T08, if the music B-1 as the probabilistic change BGM is played in a loop in the period until the probability change state ends or the reach effect in the super reach is executed. Good.

As described above, when the music B-1 which becomes the BGM during the probabilistic change is reproduced in a loop in the probabilistic state, the audio data read target area is provided in the audio data first storage area R11 and the effect data memory 90123A provided in the ROM 90121. It switches to the voice data second storage area R12. Audio data second storage area R1 in the effect data memory 121
2 corresponds to a specific address range continuous from the final address of the audio data first storage area R11 in the ROM 90121. Therefore, the CPU 90130 is the music B-1.
If the start address MA09 + 1 and the end address MA1a are specified, the audio data can be read while updating (incrementing) the address in the same way as when playing other songs, and the audio data corresponding to the song B-1 can be read as audio data. Music B-1 can be reproduced by smoothly reading from both the first storage area R11 and the audio data second storage area R12.

In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 41, by executing the effect data transfer process in the initial setting process of step S9056, at least a part of the effect data used for executing the effect by various effect devices. However, for example, ROM 90121 to RA
Transferred to M90122 or work memory 90131, or production data memory 90123
It may be transferred from A to 90123C or the like to VRAM90141 or the like. In this case, for example, control of transferring the image data read from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B to the VRAM 90141 is started, and in parallel with this transfer, the movable member 90
The initial operation such as 51 to 9054 may be executed. In this way, by executing the initial operation of the movable member in parallel with the transfer of the predetermined effect data, the effect data can be efficiently transferred and the occurrence of delay can be suppressed.

Alternatively, the first effect data used for executing the effect by the display device, for example, the main image display device 905MA, can be used for the operation of the movable members 9051 to 9054 or the speaker 9.
It may be transferred with priority over the second effect data used for executing an effect different from the effect by the display device, such as audio output by 08L and 908R. In this case, in parallel with the transfer of the second effect data, the main image display device 9 uses the first effect data that has already been transferred.
The initial signal is supplied to 05MA and the like. As a result, the effect data can be efficiently transferred, and the initial display by the display device such as the main image display device 905MA can be started within a short time after the power supply is started. Stable display can be suppressed.

In the effect data transfer process, the transfer of the initial operation data used for the initial operation of the movable member may be started, and then the transfer of the initial display data used for the initial display of the display device may be started. Further, in the effect data transfer process, the transfer of the normal operation data used for the normal operation of the movable member may be started, and then the transfer of the normal display data used for the normal display of the display device may be started. Thus, for example, movable members 9051 to 9054, the second
The production data used to execute the production by the production device is, for example, the main image display device 905.
It is transferred with priority over the effect data used for executing the effect by the first effect device such as MA. As a result, the effect data can be efficiently transferred, for example, the movable members 9051 to 90.
By making it possible to start the initial operation by the 54 or the like within a short time after the power supply is started, the occurrence of delay can be suppressed.

In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 41, in the initial setting process of step S9056,
Control to execute the initial operation by the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 may be performed. As such an initial operation, the movable members 9051 to 9054 are moved from the retracted state as the second state, which does not overlap with the display screen (display area) of the main image display device 905MA.
It may be changed to the advanced state as the first state that overlaps with the display screen (display area) of the main image display device 905MA. As a result, for example, by making the display area of the main image display device 905MA on which unstable display is performed difficult or invisible, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of delay while appropriately performing the initial operation.

Alternatively, as an initial operation based on the control in the initial setting process, an effect device such as the movable members 9051 to 9054 may be operated with an initial operation pattern obtained by mixing a plurality of operation patterns. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 can be operated in a plurality of operation patterns in the advance notice effect and the reach effect.

FIG. 52 shows a retracted state as an initial state of the upper mechanism 9050T including the movable members 9051 and 9052 and the decorative member 9057 among the effect movable mechanisms 9050, and a plurality of operation patterns by the upper mechanism 9050T. The movable members 9051 and 9052 included in the upper mechanism 9050T are pivotally supported by the decorative member 9057 and can rotate, and the movable member 90
The rotation range is different between 51 and the movable member 9052. That is, the movable member 9052
It can rotate between a retracted position and an advanced position with respect to the movable member 9051. Movable member 905
Reference numeral 1 denotes a configuration in which a base body is arranged behind a front surface portion provided with a plurality of light emitting bodies, and holds a movable member 9052 between the front surface portion and the base body.

As shown in FIG. 52 (A), when the upper mechanism 9050T is in the retracted state as the initial state, the movable member 9051 is located on the upper side in a state in which the longitudinal direction is substantially horizontal. Figure 5
In the operation pattern T1 shown in 2 (B), the movable member 9052 can be rotated by the driving force of the operation motor 9060B shown in FIG. 22 without moving the decorative member 9057 and the movable member 9051. In the operation pattern T2 shown in FIG. 52 (C), the movable member 9051, as the decorative member 9057 moves downward due to the driving force of the operation motor 9060A shown in FIG.
The 9052 can be rotated in an overlapping state. Operation pattern T shown in FIG. 52 (D)
In 3, the movable member 9051 is rotated by the driving force of the operating motor 9060A as the decorative member 9057 moves downward, and the movable member 9052 is rotated with respect to the movable member 9051 by the driving force of the operating motor 9060B. Movable member 9 below the movable member 9051
052 can be advanced.

FIG. 53 shows a retracted state as an initial state of the lower mechanism 9050B provided with movable members 9053 and 9054, and a plurality of operation patterns by the lower mechanism 9050B among the effect movable mechanisms 9050. The movable members 9053 and 9054 included in the lower mechanism 9050B are connected to the frame of the lower support unit via a predetermined link mechanism, and can be moved within a predetermined range by the power of the operation motor 9060C shown in FIG. The link mechanism includes, for example, the link members 90642a and 90642b and the link member 90645 shown in FIG. 53 (B).
a, 90645b and the like are included. One end of the link members 90645a and 90645b is pivotally supported by the frame, and the other end is pivotally supported near the lower end of the movable member 9054 to guide the movement of the movable member 9054.

As shown in FIG. 53 (A), when the lower mechanism 9050B is in the retracted state as the initial state, each of the movable members 9053 and 9054 is located below and the movable member 9 is located.
The 053 is located behind the movable member 9054, and the player can hardly see the movable member 9053. In the operation pattern B1 shown in FIG. 53 (B), the operation motor 9050
Due to the driving force of C, the movable member 9053 moves upward from the back side of the movable member 9054 with some rotation. In the operation pattern B2 shown in FIG. 53 (C), the movable member 9054 can be moved upward with the movement of the movable member 9053 by the further driving force of the operation motor 9050C.

The initial operation pattern makes it possible to execute an initial operation in which the upper mechanism 9050T is continuously operated in the operation patterns T1 to T3 and an initial operation in which the lower mechanism 9050B is continuously operated in the operation patterns B1 and B2. The initial operation to operate the upper mechanism 9050T and the lower mechanism 90
The initial operation for operating the 50B may be set so that each initial operation is executed in order and the execution periods of each other do not overlap, or at least a part of the execution periods overlap.
It may be set so that each initial operation can be executed in parallel. Even if each initial operation is executed in sequence, the initial operation executed before the initial operation time elapses is an initial operation pattern formed by mixing a plurality of operation patterns, and the movable members 9051 to 90
The 54 and the decorative member 9057 will be operated. Further, when each initial operation is executed in parallel, the movable members 9051 to 9054 and decoration are used in the initial operation pattern obtained by mixing a plurality of operation patterns during the period in which the initial operations are executed in parallel. The member 9057 is operated.

In this way, the movable member 9051 has an initial operation pattern obtained by mixing a plurality of operation patterns.
~ 9054 and decorative member 9057 are operated. As a result, when the power supply of the pachinko game machine 901 is started, the effect device can be operated in a plurality of operation patterns corresponding to the effect accompanying the execution of the game, and the operation can be confirmed appropriately.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and a part described in the above-described embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have the structure of.

As a specific example, in the above embodiment, when it is determined in step S9057 shown in FIG. 41 that the relay non-connection flag is on, the origin abnormality is not notified in step S9060. That is, the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016.
While it is possible to perform abnormality notification of the movable member when A is connected, the effect control board 9
When 012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected, control is performed so as not to notify the abnormality of the movable member. At the same time, when it is determined in step S9054 shown in FIG. 41 that there is no connection with the main board 9011 and it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. 44 (A) that the relay unconnected flag is on, step S90206 It is controlled to display the checksum calculation contents etc. by the update display of. That is, when both the effect control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the checksum calculation result and the like can be displayed, while the effect control relay board 9
When either one of the 016A and the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, control is performed so that the checksum calculation result and the like are not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the control of whether or not the abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed and the control of whether or not the checksum calculation result and the like can be displayed. Anything that is configured to be feasible will do.

In the following, first, a modification relating to the abnormality notification of the movable member will be described. In the above embodiment, when it is determined in step S9057 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 41 that the relay unconnected flag is on, the processes of steps S9058 and S9059 are performed in step S906.
It has been described that by not executing the process together with the process of 0, not only the abnormality notification of the movable member but also the confirmation of the origin position is not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, even when the relay non-connection flag is turned on, both steps S9058 and S9059 or only step S9058 may be executed. That is, when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected, the origin position of the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be confirmed based on the position detection signal from the movable member position sensor 9061. While determining the presence or absence of the origin abnormality, control may be performed so as not to notify the abnormality of the movable member when the origin abnormality occurs.

Alternatively, even when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected, the abnormality notification of the movable member can be performed, while the notification mode of the abnormality notification is the effect control board 9012 and the effect control. The notification mode may be difficult to recognize as compared with the notification mode of the abnormality notification when the relay board 9016A is connected. For example, when an abnormality notification of a movable member is performed by displaying an image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, the display size of the image is reduced, the transparency of the image is increased, and the image is displayed. Shortening the period, reducing the number of times the image is displayed,
Alternatively, a notification mode in which it is difficult to recognize the abnormality notification of the movable member may be made by a combination of a part or all of them. When the notification operation is performed using a plurality of effect devices, the notification mode may be such that it is difficult to recognize the abnormality notification of the movable member by reducing the number of the production devices used for the notification operation. In this way, the range of the connection state of whether or not the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected is defined, and the limit of the abnormality notification that the abnormality notification of the movable member is not executed is defined, or By setting the limit of the abnormality notification that the notification mode is difficult to recognize, the abnormality notification of the movable member may be limited according to the connection state.

In the above-described embodiment, in the effect control main process shown in FIG. 41, the initial operation of the movable member can be executed in the initial setting process of step S9056 even when the relay non-connection flag is on. On the other hand, when the relay non-connection flag is on, it may be controlled not to execute the initial operation of the movable member. That is, the effect control board 90
When the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected, the initial operation of the movable member can be executed when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected. It may be controlled so as not to perform the initial operation of the movable member.

In the above embodiment, the effect control board 9012 is used like the effect control relay board 9016A.
And the board directly connected via the harness HN1 (without passing through another board) is controlled so as not to notify the abnormality of the movable member when it is not connected to the effect control board 9012. explained. On the other hand, for example, like the drive control board 9016B,
Controls that are indirectly connected to the effect control board 9012 via another board such as the effect control relay board 9016A so as not to notify an abnormality of the movable member when the effect control board 9012 is not connected. You may.

In the above embodiment, the operating motors 9060A to 9060C for providing a driving force for moving the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the movable member position sensor 9061 for detecting the operating state of the movable members 9051 to 9054 are both provided. It has been described as being connected to the drive control board 9016B. On the other hand, the substrate to which the operation motors 9060A to 9060C are connected and the substrate to which the movable member position sensor 9061 is connected may be provided separately. For example, the operation motors 9060A to 9060C may be connected to the drive control board 9016B, while the movable member position sensor 9061 may be configured to be connected to a sensor board different from the drive control board 9016B. In this case, different controls may be performed on a plurality of boards that can be directly or indirectly connected to the effect control board 9012 according to their respective connection states. As an example, the effect control board 9012 and the drive control board 901
When the effect control board 9012 and the sensor board are not connected while the 6A is directly or indirectly connected, the initial operation of the movable member is executed, and the abnormality notification of the movable member is notified. May be controlled so as not to perform. Further, the effect control board 9012 and the drive control board 9
When the effect control board 9012 and the sensor board are directly or indirectly connected to each other while the 016A is not connected, the initial operation of the movable member is not executed, while the abnormality notification of the movable member is performed. May be controlled to do.

In the above embodiment, as a configuration for detecting the state of the movable members such as the movable members 9051 to 9054, the movable member position sensor 9061 is used to enable the detection of the positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the like. On the other hand, any state of the movable member may be detectable, and an abnormality notification of the movable member may be executed based on the detection result. For example, a sensor that can directly or indirectly detect the speed, acceleration, movement amount, rotation amount, operating time, shape, temperature, or a part or all of the movable members 9051 to 9054 at a predetermined position. Anything may be set as long as it can be set to enable abnormality notification of the movable member based on the detection result. Further, with the state of the movable member such as the movable members 9051 to 9054, or instead of the state of the movable member, the operation motor 9060
It may be possible to detect an arbitrary state in a driving mechanism that supplies a driving force for changing (moving) a movable member such as A to 9060C, and to be able to execute abnormality notification based on the detection result. Instead of the operating motors 9060A to 9060C, the movable member may be changed (moved) by an arbitrary driving mechanism that supplies a driving force such as a solenoid. In this way, it may be possible to detect an arbitrary state in an arbitrary drive mechanism and execute abnormality notification based on the detection result.

In the above embodiment, the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 are confirmed in step S9058 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 41, and when it is determined in step S9059 that there is an origin abnormality, step S9060 is performed. It has been described as a notification that an origin abnormality has occurred. With the abnormality notification in the initial setting of the movable member, or instead of the abnormality notification in the initial setting of the movable member, for example, step S906 shown in FIG. 41
Based on the result of detecting the state of the movable members 9051 to 9054 in the effect control process process of 5, the abnormality notification of the movable member may be enabled. Regarding the abnormality notification during normal operation of such a movable member, the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9
While the abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed when the 016A is connected, the abnormality notification of the movable member is not performed when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected. It may be controlled as follows.

In the above embodiment, it has been described that the movable member for the effect can be notified of the abnormality, such as the movable members 9051 to 9054. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be capable of executing abnormality notification for any movable member that can move according to the progress of the game. For example, the solenoid 9 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. 22
The wiring for driving the solenoid 9028 for the 027 or the grand prize opening door may be connected to the main board 9011 via the solenoid relay board. Further, detection by a sensor for detecting the operating state of the movable wing piece provided in the normal variable winning ball device 906B and a sensor for detecting the operating state of the large winning opening door provided in the special variable winning ball device 907. Wiring for transmitting signals may be connected to the main board 9011 via a solenoid relay board or a sensor relay board. In such a configuration, when the main board 9011 is connected to the solenoid relay board or the sensor relay board, it is possible to perform abnormality notification of the movable wing piece or the prize-winning door, while the main board 9011 and the solenoid relay board. Alternatively, when the sensor relay board is not connected, it may be controlled so as not to notify the abnormality of the movable wing piece or the grand prize opening door. Alternatively, when the payout control board and the launch control board are connected, the launch motor abnormality notification can be executed, while when the payout control board and the launch control board are not connected, the launch motor abnormality is enabled. It may be controlled so that the notification is not performed.

Further, the movable member is not limited to the one capable of executing the abnormality notification, and may be capable of executing the abnormality notification for any circuit, device or other element. It is not limited to the abnormality notification, and may be capable of any output.

In the above embodiment, it has been described that the presence or absence of the abnormality notification is different depending on the connection state between a plurality of boards such as the connection state between the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the presence or absence of abnormality notification may be different depending on, for example, a connection state in an arbitrary circuit, device, or other element provided inside or outside a single substrate. That is, in a configuration in which a first connection portion and a second connection portion that can be connected to each other are provided, it is possible to execute an arbitrary abnormality notification when the first connection portion and the second connection portion are connected. , When the first connection part and the second connection part are not connected, it may be controlled so as not to perform an abnormality notification. Not limited to abnormality notification, in a configuration in which a first connection portion and a second connection portion that can be connected to each other are provided, arbitrary output is possible when the first connection portion and the second connection portion are connected. On the other hand, when the first connection portion and the second connection portion are not connected, control may be performed so as not to output. Further, the unconnected state between the boards and the unconnected state between the connecting portions may include a state in which at least some wirings are connected and some other wirings are not connected. ..

Next, a modified example for displaying the checksum calculation result or the like will be described. In the above embodiment, when it is determined in step S9054 shown in FIG. 41 that there is no connection with the main board 9011, the memory inspection process is executed in step S9055, and in step S90205 shown in FIG. 44 (A). If it is determined that the relay not connected flag is off, step S902
It has been described as controlling so that the checksum calculation result and the like are not displayed by not executing the process of 06. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if it is determined in step S9054 shown in FIG. 41 that there is no connection with the main board 9011, if the relay unconnected flag is off, the memory inspection process in step S9055 is executed. It may not be done. That is, even if the effect control board 9012 and the main board 9011 are not connected, if the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected, the ROM
It may be controlled so that the checksum calculation itself using the effect data stored in the 90121 or the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is not executed, and the operation result or the like is not displayed accordingly. Further, in step S9054 shown in FIG. 41, it is determined whether or not the relay non-connection flag is on, and if it is determined that the relay not connected flag is on, step S905 is determined.
The memory inspection process of 5 may be executed. In this case, step S9 shown in FIG. 44 (A).
In 0205, it is determined whether or not there is a connection with the main board 9011, and if it is determined that there is no connection, the checksum calculation result and the like can be displayed in step S90206, while it is determined that there is a connection. May be controlled so that the checksum calculation result and the like are not displayed by not executing the process of step S90206. As described above, when either one of the main board 9011 and the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the checksum calculation result is not executed by executing the checksum calculation process itself. It may be controlled not to display such as, or it may be controlled so that the checksum calculation result is not displayed although the process of calculating the checksum is executed.

Alternatively, even when either one of the main board 9011 and the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the checksum calculation result and the like can be displayed, while the display mode is , Main board 9011 and relay board 901 for effect control
The display mode may be difficult to recognize as compared with the display mode when both 6A and the effect control board 9012 are not connected. For example, the main image display device 905MA
When displaying the checksum calculation result by displaying the image on the screen of the sub-image display device 905SU, reduce the display size of the image, increase the transparency of the image, and shorten the display period of the image. , The number of times the image is displayed is reduced, or a part or all of these are combined, so that the checksum calculation result or the like can be displayed in a display mode that is difficult to recognize. In this way, whether both the main board 9011 and the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 are not connected or the main board 901
1. Define the range of the connected state as to whether one of the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 is not connected, and set the display limit of not displaying the checksum calculation result. Alternatively, the display may be limited according to the connection state by setting a display limit of displaying in a display mode that is difficult to recognize.

In the above embodiment, the main board 9011 is indirectly connected to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015, while the effect control relay board 9016A is directly connected to the effect control board 9016A via the harness HN1 (via another board). It has been described as being connected to the effect control board 9012 (without). On the other hand, for example, like the drive control board 9016B, the effect control relay board 90
For a plurality of boards indirectly connected to the effect control board 9012 via another board such as 16A, when all of them and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the checksum calculation result and the like are displayed. It is possible to control so that the checksum calculation result or the like is not displayed when a part of them and the effect control board 9012 are not connected. Alternatively, for a plurality of boards that can be directly connected to the effect control board 9012, when all of them and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the checksum calculation result and the like can be displayed, and one of them can be displayed. When the unit and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, it may be controlled so as not to display the checksum calculation result or the like.

In the above embodiment, the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123
As a determination process for determining whether or not the effect data stored in C is normal, FIG. 44 (A)
The checksum is calculated in step S90204 in the memory inspection process as shown in the above.
It has been described as making it possible to display the calculation result and the like. On the other hand, the data determination method is not limited to the checksum calculation, and any determination method can be adopted. The checksum calculation is not limited to the one that calculates the exclusive OR for each data at address 1, and may be the one that calculates the exclusive OR or the like with the data at multiple addresses as the calculation unit.

In the above embodiment, the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 901
The checksum of the stored data is calculated for the entire 23C, and the calculation result and the like can be displayed. On the other hand, the checksum of the stored data may be calculated for a part of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and the calculation result or the like may be displayed. Whether or not the checksum is to be calculated may be different depending on the stored contents in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. For example, a program for effect control and various management data stored in the first storage area of ROM 90121, and effect data memories 90123A, 90.
The image data stored in the 123B can be displayed as a checksum calculation target, such as the calculation result, while the audio data stored in the second storage area of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90123A are stored. Audio data other than image data, motor data and light emission data stored in the effect data memory 90123C may not be subject to checksum calculation, and the calculation result or the like may not be displayed. The setting of which stored data is used to calculate the checksum may be different depending on the condition in which the predetermined calculation condition is satisfied. For example, when the power is turned on while the push button 9031B is pressed, the checksum can be calculated using the stored data of the ROM 90121 and the calculation result can be displayed, while the effect data memories 90123A to 90
The checksum calculation using the stored data of 123C may not be performed.

In the above embodiment, the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123
A storage device such as C, which is mounted on the effect control board 9012 and can store the effect data used for executing the effect, has been described as being capable of displaying the determination result of whether or not the stored data is normal. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for a storage device capable of storing control data used for arbitrary control in the pachinko gaming machine 901, it is possible to display a determination result of whether or not the stored data is normal. You may. For example, main board 9
Control data mounted on 011 and used to control the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (
ROM90 that can store the binary code that makes up the program module)
Regarding 101, it may be possible to display a determination result as to whether or not the stored data is normal. In this case, the main board 9011, for example, a payout control board or an information terminal board.
Of the plurality of boards that can be connected to the above, the second board and the third board may be set in advance. Then, when both the second board and the second board and the main board 9011 are not connected, the determination result of the stored data such as the checksum calculation result using the stored data of the ROM 90101 is displayed on the main image display device 905MA. It is possible to display on a display device such as the second
When either one of the substrate and the third substrate and the main substrate 9011 are not connected, it may be controlled not to display the determination result of the stored data. Further, the storage data of the non-volatile recording medium such as ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is not limited to those for determining whether or not the storage data is normal, and for example, the RAM 90122 and the work memory 9
It may be possible to determine whether or not the stored data of the volatile recording medium such as 0131 is normal and display the determination result.

In the above embodiment, a checksum calculation result that is a determination result of storage data is obtained according to the connection state between a plurality of boards such as the connection state between the effect control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. It was explained as different whether or not to display such as. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to display the determination result of the stored data differs depending on, for example, the connection state in an arbitrary circuit, device, or other element provided inside or outside the single substrate. It may be a thing. That is, in a configuration in which a second connection portion and a third connection portion that can be connected to the first connection portion are provided, both the second connection portion and the third connection portion and the first connection portion are not connected. The judgment result by the judgment processing using the stored data can be displayed, and the stored data is used when either one of the second connection part and the third connection part and the first connection part are not connected. It may be controlled so as not to display the determination result by the determination process. The display is not limited to the display of the judgment result by the judgment processing using the stored data, and in the configuration in which the second connection part and the third connection part that can be connected to the first connection part are provided, the second connection part and the third connection part are provided. When both of the above and the first connection part are not connected, it is possible to output an arbitrary processing result using arbitrary data, and either one of the second connection part and the third connection part and the first connection part can be output. It may be controlled so as not to output an arbitrary processing result using arbitrary data when and is not connected.

In addition, various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the configuration for confirming the connection state uses the voltage at the connection confirmation terminals such as the terminals TM22 and TN22 shown in FIGS. 42 (A) and 42 (B), or determines the presence / absence of command reception. The connection state may be arbitrarily confirmed mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically by using, for example, a switch or a sensor.

In the above embodiment, in the process of step S90102 shown in FIG. 39, it is determined whether or not the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is set to a special gaming state such as a probability change state.
It was explained that the probability variation control condition is satisfied based on the determination of the probability variation state, and the probability variation state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a probabilistic attacker provided at a predetermined position in the game area wins a prize (the second prize opening) (
The probability change control condition may be satisfied based on the fact that the game ball that has entered) is detected by the probability change detection switch, and the game state after the end of the jackpot game state may be controlled to the probability change state. The probabilistic attacker's big winning opening (second big winning opening) can change from the closed state to the open state when the number of round games executed in the big hit game state is a predetermined number of times (for example, "16"), and the round When the number of times the game is executed is other than the predetermined number of times, it may not be possible to change to the open state while remaining in the closed state. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 901 can establish the probability variation control condition based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the specific region in the attacker, which is an example of the special variable winning device provided in the gaming area. It may be configured to be.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 may not perform variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol. As an example, the variable winning device provided in the game area is closed (second state) based on the detection of a game ball that has passed (entered) the starting winning opening provided in the game area.
When the game ball that has entered the inside of the variable winning device enters a specific area (V winning opening) among a plurality of areas by changing from the open state (first state) to the open state (first state), a jackpot game that is advantageous for the player. It may be controlled by the state. In such a pachinko gaming machine 901, FIG.
Control of whether or not the abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed by executing the effect control main process as shown in 1 and the memory inspection process as shown in FIG. 44 (A), and the checksum calculation. Of the control of whether or not the result or the like can be displayed, at least one of them may be feasibly configured.

The present invention can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 901 but also to slot machines and the like. A slot machine is an arbitrary game machine capable of performing a predetermined game such as a variable display of a symbol serving as a plurality of types of identification information and imparting a predetermined game value based on the game result, and more specifically, the slot machine. By setting a predetermined number of bets (number of medals or credits) for one game, the game can be started, and a plurality of types of identification information (each can be identified).
One game is completed by deriving and displaying the display result of a variable display device (for example, multiple reels) that variably displays the symbol), and a prize (for example, cherry prize, watermelon prize, bell prize, etc.) is awarded according to the display result. It is a game machine that can generate replay prizes, BB prizes, RB prizes, etc.). In such a slot machine, the features of the pachinko gaming machine 901 shown in the above embodiment by the cooperation of the hardware resources including the image display device of the slot machine and the software that performs a predetermined process. It suffices if it is configured to include all or part of. That is, whether or not the slot machine can execute the abnormality notification of the movable member by executing the effect control main process as shown in FIG. 41 and the memory inspection process as shown in FIG. 44 (A). It may be configured so that at least one of the control and the control of whether or not the checksum calculation result can be displayed can be realized.

In addition, the device configuration and data configuration of the game machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device, the audio output operation in the speaker, and the top frame LED909a.
And various production operations including the lighting operation of the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the decorative LED can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the game machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type game machine in which a predetermined number of game media are paid out as prizes based on the occurrence of a prize, and a score is scored based on the occurrence of a prize by enclosing the game medium. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that grants.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in the game machine such as a pachinko game machine 901 or a slot machine. It may be distributed by pre-installing it in a storage device such as a computer device in advance. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be a form of directly executing using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

As described above, in the above embodiment, for example, step S9057 shown in FIG. 41.
When it is determined that the relay unconnected flag is on in step S9060, the origin abnormality is not notified in step S9060. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S9057 that the relay non-connection flag is off, the notification of the origin abnormality in step S9060 can be executed. In this way, the first substrate such as the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 90
By controlling so that the abnormality notification of the movable member is not performed when the second board such as 16A is not connected, it is possible to prevent the abnormality notification from being frequently executed at the manufacturing stage or the development stage. Therefore, work efficiency can be improved.

The connectors CN01 and CN11 shown in FIGS. 42 (A) and 42 (B) include terminals TM22 and TN22 as connection confirmation terminals, respectively, and in step S9052 and the like shown in FIG. 41, based on the voltage at these connection confirmation terminals. Check the connection status. As a result, the connection status can be confirmed with a simple configuration.

In the above embodiment, for example, in step S9054 shown in FIG. 41, it is determined that there is no connection with the main board 9011, and in step S90205 shown in FIG. 44 (A), it is determined that the relay unconnected flag is on. In addition, the update display in step S90206 is controlled to display the checksum calculation content and the like. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S9054 that there is a connection with the main board 9011, or in step S9020 shown in FIG. 44 (A).
When it is determined in step 5 that the relay non-connection flag is off, the update display in step S90206 is not performed, and control is performed so that the checksum calculation content and the like are not displayed. In this way, in the configuration including the first substrate such as the effect control board 9012 and the second and third boards such as the effect control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011, either the second board or the third board is provided. When one of the first board and the first board are not connected, the output for inspection can be appropriately suppressed by controlling so that the determination result by the determination process such as the checksum calculation result is not displayed. As a result, for example, when installed in a game store, one of the second board and the third board and the first board are accidentally disconnected (temporary cable disconnection) and the power is turned on. In the situation, the occurrence of misidentification of failure on the amusement store side can be suppressed by not displaying the determination result by the determination process such as the checksum calculation result.

Further, for example, the ROM 90121 as shown in FIG. 24 (A) stores the voice data used for voice control, and the effect data memory 90123A as shown in FIG. 24 (B1) stores the image data used for display control and the like. The audio data is also stored in the storage area corresponding to the specific address range of the effect data memory 90123A which is continuous from the final address of the ROM 90121. In this way, by storing the first control data such as voice data in the area corresponding to the specific address range of the second area continuous from the final address of the first area, the storage area can be effectively utilized to reduce the manufacturing cost. While reducing the number, the control data can be smoothly read out and appropriate control can be performed.

Further, in the above embodiment, "different ratios" are not limited to those having different ratios due to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. A: B = 10
It is a concept that includes things with different ratios such as 0%: 0% (that is, one has 100% allocation and the other has 0% allocation).

1 Pachinko game machine 9 Production display device 18c Total hold storage display unit 91 1st character image 92 2nd character image 100 Production control microcomputer 560 Game control microcomputer 901 Pachinko game machine 905MA Main image display device 905SU Sub image display device 908L, 908R Speaker 909a Top frame LED
909b Left frame LED
909c right frame LED
9011 Main board 9012 Production control board 9016A Relay board for production control 9016B Drive control board 9016C to 9016F Light emitter control board 9051 to 9054 Movable member 9060A to 9060C Operation motor 9061 Movable member position sensor 9071 to 9074 Light emitter unit 90120 Microcomputer 90121 ROM
90123A to 90123C Production data memory 90130 CPU
90140 VDP
90411, 90413a to 90413c Luminescent driver 90412 Motor drive driver CN01, CN11 connector TM01 to TM24, TN01 to TN24 terminal

Claims (2)

It is a gaming machine that can display fluctuations and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player .
And control means for controlling the electrical parts,
In response to a control signal by a serial communication method from said control means, and an output means for outputting a specific signal for driving the electrical component,
The output means raises the output state when the input control signal is output to another output means in a first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined mode and a change mode in which the waveform rises more slowly than the first output state. It can be set to any output state of the second output state,
The other output means is provided on the same substrate as the output means.
The output means is set to the second output state.
The output means has a stop function of stopping the output of a specific signal after a lapse of a predetermined period from the input of the control signal, and the stop function can be enabled or disabled.
A gaming machine characterized in that it further includes a control signal continuation means for continuously outputting a control signal . It is a gaming machine that can display fluctuations and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player .
And control means for controlling the electrical parts,
In response to a control signal by a serial communication method from said control means, and an output means for outputting a specific signal for driving the electrical component,
The output means raises the output state when the input control signal is output to another output means in a first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined mode and a change mode in which the waveform rises more slowly than the first output state. It can be set to any output state of the second output state,
The other output means is provided on another board connected to the board on which the output means is provided via a wiring member.
The output means is set to the first output state.
The output means has a stop function of stopping the output of a specific signal after a lapse of a predetermined period from the input of the control signal, and the stop function can be enabled or disabled.
A gaming machine characterized in that it further includes a control signal continuation means for continuously outputting a control signal .